JP2022151354A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suitably perform display control in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine comprising game control means capable of executing a game includes: a ball entry area that a game ball can enter; a first display unit which can be seen by a player; and a second display unit which is more difficult for a player to see than the first display section. The game control means can output first information to the first display unit when a ball enters the ball entry area and can output second information on the second display unit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 107

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that executes display control (setting and outputting output data, etc.) to a plurality of display devices (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-58503 A

However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in terms of performing display control appropriately.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to suitably perform display control.

According to a representative embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine having game control means capable of executing a game includes a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, a first display section visible to a player, and a second display section that is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the first display section, and the game control means can output the first information to the first display section when the ball enters the ball entry area. and the second information can be output to the second display section.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to one form of this invention, display control can be performed suitably.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a specific area switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure fluctuation|variation. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time saving end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of processing during a special figure display. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a support operation setting process; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a role game process; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during normal per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric remaining bulb processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of end processing per normal figure. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process; FIG. 4 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. It is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. It is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal map fluctuation display game and the normal electric operation. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. It is a time chart showing an example 1 of occurrence of a gap between the start timing of the general electricity opening and the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is a time chart showing an example 2 of the occurrence of a gap between the start timing of the general electricity opening and the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is a figure explaining a gap countermeasure. 9 is a time chart showing the effect (effect 1) of the deviation countermeasure against forward deviation. 10 is a time chart showing the effect (effect 2) of the deviation countermeasure for the backward deviation. It is a time chart explaining a method of increasing the remaining hold by stopping. It is a time chart explaining the countermeasure against stop hitting. It is a figure which shows an example of how-to-play instruction|indication display. It is a figure which illustrates the gradual change of the hitting-how-instruction display. It is an example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display apparatus in time series (the 1). FIG. 11 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in chronological order (No. 2). FIG. 3 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order (No. 3). FIG. 4 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order (No. 4). It is another example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display apparatus in time series (part 1). FIG. 11 is another example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in chronological order (No. 2). Regarding the modification, it is a table showing the support state corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the number of times of time saving, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. It is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern fluctuation display game and the general electric operation, etc. with respect to the modified example. It is a figure which shows the opening pattern of a normal variable winning device (general electricity) regarding a modification (the 1). It is a figure which shows the release pattern of a normal variable winning device (general electricity) regarding a modification (part 2). Regarding the modification, it is a timing chart showing the game state, the normal pattern probability, the normal pattern state, the general pattern state, the special figure 2 reservation number, the special figure fluctuation, etc., after the big hit in the symbol B. Regarding the modification, it is a timing chart showing the game state, the normal pattern probability, the normal pattern state, the normal pattern state, the special figure 2 reservation number, the special figure fluctuation etc. Regarding the modification, it is a timing chart showing the game state, normal pattern probability, normal pattern state, normal pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation etc. FIG. 10 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order regarding the modified example (No. 1). FIG. 10 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in chronological order regarding the modified example (No. 2). In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition after a time saving state from a time saving state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example (middle stage) of the screen transition after a time saving state from a time saving state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example (second half) of the screen transition after a time saving state from a time saving state. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition from the time saving state in a time saving 100 times machine. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition in the modification of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (second half) of the screen transition in the modification of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in Modification 2 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in Modification 3 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in modifications 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 pending display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in modification 6 of the special figure 2 pending display. In the third embodiment, it is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state. In the third embodiment, it is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of a normal figure fluctuation display game and normal electric operation|movement. In the third embodiment, from the time saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state to digest the remaining hold), the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), the general figure state, the general electric state, It is a timing chart showing the number of special figures 2 pending. In the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (first half). FIG. 16 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (second half). It is another example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series regarding 4th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a lamp display device in relation to the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining the display mode of the 4th pattern in the lamp display parts 1 and 2. It is a diagram for explaining the display of the special figure 1 reservation number or the special figure 2 reservation number in the lamp display unit 3-6. It is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of main processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of performance display editing processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of performance display monitor control processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus which concerns on 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of base values displayed as performance information on a performance display device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing how segment output data is output to a collective display device and how segment output data is output to a performance display device in the sixth embodiment;

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 . In addition, the left end of the opening/closing frame is a shaft attachment end to be attached to a hinge, and the right end is an open end to be opened by rotation.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 1 capable of emitting light according to the game state are provided.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes a performance device that performs lighting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, it is also possible to always generate the variable probability state when a big win occurs without determining whether or not to generate the variable probability state by the big win symbol random number.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device includes a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
, and a balance display unit 26 . A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device has a momentum (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area.
can be changed according to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be shot in various shooting modes with different shooting momentum. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the . The gaming machine 10
A game is played by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. - 特許庁In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable prize winning device 37,
A game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.例文帳に追加

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides a condition for starting the special figure variation display game. center case 40
In the game area 32 on the right side of the normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessories, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts to a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. A game ball is more likely to enter the start winning hole 36 when hitting to the left, and a game ball is more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (win easy state advantageous to the player) in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy winning state),
A closed state (non-easy-winning state, difficult-to-win state) in which game balls are difficult to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 is established.

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or special games. By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state generated in the normal game state in which the game is not performed, the time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7)
A first special variable prize winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an attacker type open/close door 38c that opens a lower prize winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of reduced time/variable number of times after the end of the big win). A lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided in the lower special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win a prize when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, there is an upper big winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig. 3
), there is provided a second special variable winning device 39 having an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper big winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right. Second special variable winning device 39
, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the state of closing the big prize hole (disadvantageous closed state for the player) is changed to the open state (advantageous special game state for the player), and the game ball into the big prize hole By facilitating the inflow of the game, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, the number of prize balls or the number of time reduction/variable number of times after the end of the big hit). An upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for the game ball to win when hitting to the right. Also, the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) after the open/close door 39c is opened by the small win, the big win is decided. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100
Passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. Information indicating that there was a V prize (specified region passing command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, the second
A game ball V wins in a specific area 86 (V winning opening) in the special variable winning device 39, and a big hit occurs.

General winning gate 35, starting winning gate 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning prize opening. In addition, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a prize winning port. In addition, the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, and their vicinity are provided with LEDs (board decoration device to be described later) that can emit light when a game ball wins a prize. 46) are provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variation display game Storage display unit for notifying the number of memories (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56
) and The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. Normal map holding display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7),
A second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying that the game is on, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) is displayed. A round display portion 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators may be all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), or cyclic lighting (any One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs may be lit and extinguished (blinking) or cyclically lit. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1. It is possible to configure appropriately in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

Lamp display device 80, the lamp display units 1, 2 (LED) to perform a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguished display as symbols (fourth special symbol, fourth symbol to be described later), and each special figure variation It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of start (hold) memories of the display game. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, switching between turning off and lighting on the lamp display units 1 and 2 takes 2 cycles of the flashing cycle.
It is performed in a period of 1/(eg, 100 msec). The game control device 1
00, the fluctuation time of the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41). conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning devices 38, 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when game balls enter the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning hole enters the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 through.

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number (normal pattern reservation number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal pattern start memory (normal pattern suspension) stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the normal pattern variation display game.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern (normal pattern) displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time,
By driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds×2 times), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is prevented. Permissible.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to the predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 pending). . In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning prize to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation), the special figure 2 variable display game with the special figure 2 indicator 52 to run.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols).

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39 is the big winning opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (
3), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a special winning opening that opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win a lot of game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig. 3).
), the large winning opening is changed from closed to open for a predetermined short period of time.
In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state. For simplicity, in this embodiment, the special variable winning device 39 (
Only the upper big winning opening) is converted to the open state, and only the special variable winning device 38 (lower big winning opening) is converted to the open state in the big winning state (including the big winning state due to the V winning during the small winning). explain.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38,39. In addition, when the condition device operates, the specific area 86
It may mean that there was a game ball passing through (V winning). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small prize lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V prize during the small hit state, the conditional device is activated. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, the "condition device" is
It is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and is also used in this specification as a term with the same meaning. ing.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure variation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority digestion, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may not be executed at the same time.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches (38a, 39a) in the normal variable prize winning device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, a magnetic field is generated. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a changing phenomenon is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
Setting changing means (setting changing device 42, setting means) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions is configured. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to transition to various states such as a changeable (settable) setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability set values can be confirmed. .

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed as follows. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and the systems (types) of ready-to-win effects with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach.
The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability that the production will be a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Design random number, design random number per sapo for determining the time-saving design (stop design per sapo) described later,
A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and non-reach variation displays), and an oscillation circuit CPU 1 based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from 113
11a is provided with a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Switch 36a, starter 2 switch 37a in second starter winning port 37 (ordinary variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
, and is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . Specific area switch 72
, detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to a specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls passing through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Switch 63, a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of game machine 10
5 is input.

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 . The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b that operates a lever and opens a specific area 86 for outputting opening/closing data. Two output ports 134 are provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives an opening/closing data signal for the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc., generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, and a current supply for the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b for outputting an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the side, and a third driver for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c for driving the digit lines draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line. L selected sequentially with
A power supply voltage flows through the ED to light it up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 etc.
can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings).

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls),
Number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111 , determines display content, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, and controls the sound source LSI 314 .
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the 00 game microcomputer 111 extracts a random value for determining a hit in a normal game based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 3 seconds x 2 times) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable state) is
It is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control may be performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 3 per unit time is higher than the normal game state in which no special game is performed.
In order to control the opening time of 7 to be substantially longer, it will be in the general electricity support state. note that,
Even in a high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, it will be duplicated in a time-saving state and the general electricity support will be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) can be shortened more than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern hit probability) is set to a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win prizes in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which special games are not performed, and the number of times the special figure variable display game is executed per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. Can be increased. again,
It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states with different things to change. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) (setting change state, settable state). state, setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

When the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, transition to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode);
AM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

If the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (result of A1008 is "N")
, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Activate the circuit (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
For U111a, there is provided a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a random number update trigger that is supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 100, RAM (here RAM111c) indicating the abnormality of RA
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), a checksum for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, indicating that the RAM is abnormal.
Clear the abnormal flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 uses the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 resets the RAM (RAM
111c) is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-Probability setting confirmation process in A1037 (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046 are executed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023
result is "Y"), a command of main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024)
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
0 anomaly is reported.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 controls the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop on the performance display device 152.
0 is output (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). In addition, here, the information about the jackpot is stored in the RAM
111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are kept off. After that, repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and wait,
Once again, the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is performed, and the power is turned on. Note that while the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001
), the game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be performed because the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing cannot be performed.

In this way, setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though the two ON operations are not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024 to A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data ("E1" error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and security signal ON data is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. Then steps A1025 and A10
26 is repeated and waited.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
”), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value “1”), and then (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
'), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the production control device 30
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61 is executed when a power failure occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036
The result is "Y"), prohibits the interruption (A1038), and transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Also, here, in addition to the probability setting value area, the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the performance display work area and performance display stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are cleared. It is also possible to configure without The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes, etc. For example, the ball output rate, base value (ball output rate in normal game state), role ratio, number of discharged balls, etc. is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
041 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on (power recovery) processing is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirming flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), step A10
47 is processed.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and RAM
Notification of initialization (RAM clearing) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting)
, is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small winning design random number to determine small winning design (small winning design initial value random number), initial value of support per design random number to determine time saving design (support per design) initial value random number), the initial value of the winning random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit initial value random number), the initial value of the falling lottery random number used in the falling lottery (falling lottery initial value random number), etc.) Save in a specified area (A1048) and enable interrupts (A1049)
). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although it is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the hit pattern random number (big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, supporter pattern random number), the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate using a generated random number. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the winning symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. CTC output that has the same cycle as processing (CTC (CTC
2) is a "slow counter" that is updated based on ).

In addition, in the winning random number, winning pattern random number, and falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. there is Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the winning symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the performance display work area and the performance display stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (cleared in step A1042). if not). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

If the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130
4 result is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, output for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, big winning opening solenoid 39b) and driving control of LEDs (light emission control) Processing is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), and furthermore, hits pattern random numbers, hits random numbers, etc. in software. Update random number update process 1 (A1308)
, Random number update process 2 (A1309) for updating the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is executed. After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) Execute the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process (
A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). If the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), which will be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1315 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
, Special figure game processing for performing processing relating to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312a).
Details of the special figure game processing will be described later. Subsequently, a role game process for performing a process for opening the lower prize winning opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 is executed (A1312b). Details of the role game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is the specific area switch 7
2 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y"), set the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the external information terminal 71 outputs ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (game hall internal control device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality.
(A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
result is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407
result is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after turning on the power (A240
8 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112, the game control device 100 (A2409
result is "Y"), the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability set value area corresponding to the work set value The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. The probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
”), a value corresponding to the work set value in the work set value area may be stored in the probability set value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs while changing settings (A1037
result is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. can be prevented from being changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. note that,
The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the entry of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is executed (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
. In the upper big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, the special game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure fluctuation. Execute (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is mentioned later.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure, the processing during the special figure fluctuation which performs the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100
A special figure displaying process for setting information necessary for shifting to a big hit state or a small hit state is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the special figure normal processing Set the processing number "0" related to and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, set necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and a time before opening a small win, and process number "3" relating to preprocessing for opening a small win.
Set and save in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small hit opening pre-processing is executed (A2611). For example, in the small winning opening preprocessing, the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning (small winning opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and saved in the upper big winning opening solenoid output data area. On-data is saved, a command during opening of a small win is set as a performance command, a processing number "4" relating to processing during opening of a small win is set, and saved in a special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small hit during opening processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the small hit open process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball process is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small hit remaining ball processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2614), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2615). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2616), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2617). Next, a lever solenoid control process (A2618) for controlling the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b is executed so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during the small hit, and the special figure game process is ended.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a prize-winning monitoring table for the starting prize-winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and executes the starting prize-winning port 36.
(A2703). If there is no winning to the starting winning port 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the starting prize-winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the right-handed game state (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if the gaming state is to hit to the right (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state In the case of hitting to the left), a hitting to the right instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 instructs to hit to the right (
warning) is executed on the display device 41 or the like by right-handed instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no prize to the 2nd start prize gate (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents further generation of starting memories.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing in the start switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is the upper limit value (here 4) Determine whether it is less than (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (4 here) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (number of special figures 1 pending or special figures 2 pending number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, extract the jackpot pattern random number of the special figure fluctuation display game that is started by detecting the start switch to be monitored,
It is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of WM (A2910). Subsequently, the small winning design random number of the special figure fluctuation display game started by the detection of the start opening switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area (A2911). In addition, the support winning symbol random number for determining the time saving pattern is extracted, and the support winning symbol random number is saved in the support winning symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the big win is surely generated by the V winning after the small win, so the small win symbol random number need not be used, and step A2911 is an option and may not be executed. In addition, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variation display game, if the starter switch to be monitored is the starter 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small hit symbol random number.

In addition, the small hit design random number, the support per design random number, and the big hit design random number are the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) described later. It is used to determine a stop pattern number at the time of a support hit or a stop pattern number at the time of a big win, and a small hit stop pattern pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers, a support hit stop pattern pattern or a big win stop pattern pattern.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small winning symbol random number, the support winning symbol random number, and the big winning symbol random number are provided independently.
One random number (common random number) is shared, and the small hit pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the small hit, the small hit stop pattern pattern), the support pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the support hit, the stop pattern pattern per support)
, jackpot patterns (stop pattern number at the time of jackpot, jackpot stop pattern pattern) may be sorted. That is, when determining a small winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each small winning pattern, or when determining a support winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each supporting winning pattern. Alternatively, when determining a jackpot pattern, the range of common random numbers may be divided and assigned to each jackpot pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2913), and determines the result (game result) of the variation display game in advance. Execute pending information determination processing (pre-determination processing, prefetch processing) (A29
14). In the special drawing reservation information determination process, stop design information (jackpot stop design, small hit stop design, time-saving stop design) , Lost stop pattern) and the first half fluctuation number based on the saved fluctuation pattern random number 1 to 3 (pre-reach fluctuation number)
And set the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation number (number of post-reach variation) as a production command. Then, prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting mouth switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2915), execute the production command setting process (A2916), common to the special figure start mouth switch End the process. in this way,
The game control device 100 constitutes preliminary determination means capable of determining in advance the result of the variable display game before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. again,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small hit is in progress (A3001). If the special game process number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. If it is a small hit (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (A30
02). If the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the conditional device is in operation.

Game control device 100, when the condition device is not in operation (the result of A3002 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, winning the specific area 86 (
If there is a V prize), the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is not a small hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), if the condition device is in operation (A3
002 result is "Y"), or when there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003
result is "N"), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated without doing anything.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the middle of an accessory normal process of an accessory game process described later, and
It is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (A3200). If the accessory is not being processed normally, or if the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N
”), the process proceeds to step A3215 without starting the special figure variation display game.

The game control device 100 is in the normal processing of the accessory, and the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0.
If (the result of A3200 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206)
. Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A32
If the result of step 11 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A
3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (
A3213), effect command setting processing is performed (A3214), and the process proceeds to step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A32
The result of 11 is "Y"), and set "0" related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215
), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (A3216), and clear the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
”), execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3203
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In the special figure 2 processing transition setting process, set "1" as the processing number, save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area, clear the customer waiting demonstration flag area, special figure 2 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
”), execute the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3208
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of special figure 1, "1" is set as the processing number, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority digestion). That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game. In addition, when the special figure 1 change display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 2 change display game, the determination of step A3201 is performed by special figure 1 reservation number ≠ 0 It suffices to determine whether or not

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process is executed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process, the stop pattern number at the time of losing, the support hit, or the big hit, and the losing stop pattern pattern corresponding to this stop pattern number, the support hit stop pattern pattern, or the big hit stop pattern pattern are saved. do. The stop symbol number at the time of the support win or the big win is determined corresponding to the support win symbol random number and the big win symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
. Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 12 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
To save the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating to the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for performing processing such as setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502
).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is "N"), optionally, based on the obtained big hit random number value, whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit is executed (A3607), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3608). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this time saving result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

If the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. (A3609), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process.
On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "support hit (time saving hit)", and "lose", and there is no "minor hit". It should be noted that steps A3607-A3609 are provided as an option, these may be omitted and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may not be provided with "support per (time reduction per)".
Also, it is possible to provide a "small hit" as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since the big hit and the support hit do not overlap, the support hit information may be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 14 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). In addition, for the number of reservations 1, information about the special figure start memory (
random numbers, etc.). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not it is a small hit is executed (A3704).
).

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. is overwritten and saved (A3706), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure variation display game is a support hit based on the acquired big hit random number value. is executed (A3707), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3708). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this specific result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

When the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. (A3709), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (A3708
If the result is "N"), optionally, a jackpot determination process may be executed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value (A371
0). When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is a big hit (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3712) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is not a big hit (the result of A3711 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of "small hit", "sapo hit (time saving hit)", and "loss". It is also possible to provide a "jackpot" as a result of the two-variation display game.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area. , small hit information and support hit information may be saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3604, A3710) will be described in detail. FIG. 16A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800
), set the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and determine whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. The upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of 2 is "Y"), set the failure (other than the big hit) as the judgment result (A3804), and finish the big hit judging process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "
Y"), and set a failure (other than a big hit) as the determination result (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3805). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 16B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3
900), it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3901). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. The small hit upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (ordinary probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided uniquely and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, it is also possible to provide the unique small hit random number.

The game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3903),
Finish the small hit determination process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether or not it is greater than (A3902). If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), set the deviation as the judgment result (A3903)
. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "
N"), and sets a small hit as the determination result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability is another value It's okay.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, the details of the support hit determination processing (A3607, A3707) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 16C is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. In addition, the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in the special figure pending information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the support per upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (
A7001). Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (A7002), and it is judged whether or not the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number coincides with the support hit determination value corresponding to the set probability value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. In the following cases, it is determined to be a support hit. In addition, the upper limit judgment value per support is
It may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the probability variable state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game will be a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (the lower limit judgment value per support and the upper limit judgment value per support) Between) does not overlap with the range of the aforementioned big hit determination value and small hit determination value. In this embodiment, the random number for the support hit is not provided independently, and the random number for the support hit is used to determine the hit for the support.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (
The result of A7003 is "Y"), and set a failure (other than support hit) as the judgment result (A70
05), the support hit determination process is terminated.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A7004). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value for the support (the result of A7004 is "Y"), set the deviation (other than the support) as the judgment result (
A7005). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the support upper limit judgment value (A70
04 result is "N"), and the support hit is set as the determination result (A7006). When the determination result is set, the support hit determination process is terminated.

In the support hit determination process, support hit determination (time reduction determination) is performed by a lottery using a big hit random number value. In the support hit judgment (time reduction judgment) as a lottery, when the big hit random number matches the support hit judgment value (time reduction judgment value), the result of the support hit result (time reduction result, specific result) is obtained and the time reduction is set. be. The support hit determination value is different from the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value.

In addition, in order to make a difference, the probability of winning per support (range of judgment value for support per hit / range of random numbers for jackpot) may be different for each probability setting value, and for convenience, support for each probability setting value The winning probabilities may be the same. Setting 1 (or low setting side) is easy to win per support,
Setting 6 (or high setting side) may set the probability of winning per supporter so that it is difficult to win per supporter to alleviate the disadvantage of low setting, or set it on the high setting side It may match the expectation of the player who expects that he/she can easily win the winning prize. Also, the winning probability per support may be changed monotonously from setting 1 to setting 6, or may not be monotonous, such as changing every two stages of setting. The odd-numbered setting and even-numbered setting may have different winning probabilities per supporter to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability set value.

In addition, the winning probability of the support may be differentiated between the low probability of the jackpot probability (other than during the variable probability state) and the high probability (during the variable probability state), or may be the same for simplification. In order to make it easier to win during low probability (other than during variable state) and difficult to win during high probability (during variable state),
You can set the winning probability per support to alleviate the disadvantage during the low probability, or set it on the contrary,
It may match the expectation of the player who expects that he/she can easily win the support prize during high probability. for example,
The winning probability for each supporter may be set so that the player wins for each supporter only during the low probability (the winning probability for each supporter is zero during the high probability), thereby alleviating the disadvantage during the low probability.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may have different winning probabilities per support for sharpness, or may be the same for convenience. For example, in order to increase the support hit in the general electric support state (time saving state and probability variable state), the winning probability of the support hit in the special figure 2 variable display game may be made larger than the special figure 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to improve the interest of the game in the normal game state, the probability of winning per support in the special figure 1 variation display game may be made higher than in the special figure 2 variation display game. In short, the probability of winning per support in one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is set to zero, and the support hit only in the other special figure variation display game. may occur.

When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the support hit result (time saving result), the stop symbol (stop symbol number, stop A time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern pattern) is set as a pattern pattern), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special figure fluctuation display game. That is, in this case, it suddenly becomes a time-saving state without going through a big hit (suddenly time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the time saving pattern is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the time saving pattern (decorative time saving pattern) is displayed as the decoration stop pattern by the production control device 300 in the display device 41. .

As the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41, for example, only the left pattern and the middle pattern are aligned.
1, 1, 3” and so on. There are no restrictions on time-saving patterns if they are decided in advance, but there are regularities such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right patterns are aligned. However, it is preferable because it is easy for the player to remember. A plurality of time saving patterns may be prepared, and the number of special figure fluctuation display games in which the time saving state continues (time saving number of times) may be determined for each time saving pattern.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) in the case of the time saving result (time saving pattern), unlike the case of the big hit result or the small hit result. do. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a big hit result or a small hit result, and in the case of a time saving result (time saving pattern), a neutral color such as green or blue Light may be emitted in a color system or a cool color system (that is, a color other than a warm color system). Moreover, it will be in a light-extinguishing state in the case of a deviation. Therefore, when the time-saving pattern is displayed as the stop pattern, the player can be prevented from erroneously recognizing that a big win has occurred, and the player can easily grasp that the time-saving winning has occurred.

In addition, if the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability state) reaches a predetermined number of times (so-called ceiling number of times, short-time ceiling), even if you do not win the support Enter a time-saving state (play time). At this time, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 are turned off, and if a small win or a big win, they emit light in a warm color. At this time, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light as a fourth pattern in a cold color in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the time-saving state is entered unless a small win or a big win is made. . The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, the special figure display device or the display device 41 displays a missing pattern (a time saving pattern may be used) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) as a stop pattern, and the next special figure fluctuation display game. Enter the short-time state from. In this case, the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left pattern and the middle pattern are aligned ("1, 1,
3” may be used).

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). jackpot flag 1
is a big hit (result of A4001 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4003), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area of RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A40
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 1 indicator 5
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped in 1) and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4007), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4008). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A4
011). If the support per flag 1 is per support (the result of A4011 is "Y"), load a random number from the pattern random number storage area per special figure 1 (reservation number 1) (A4012), per special figure 1 support A pattern table is set (A4013). Then, referring to the special figure 1 per support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4014). Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4015). After that, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4016),
The effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4017). after that,
The process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N") and the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (the result of A4011 is "N
”), the stop symbol number at the time of losing is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4018), and the losing stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4019). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020. It should be noted that if the process (A3607-A3609) related to the support hit in the jackpot flag 1 setting process is not executed, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), without executing steps A4011-A4017 , to step A4018.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as a production command in a decorative special figure 1 command area (A4020 ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4021). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4022), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is ended. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, missing symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 1 display device 51.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, whether or not the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A4101). small hit flag 2
is a small hit (result of A4101 is "Y"), the jackpot design random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (A4103), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area of RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball wins V by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so the special figure 2 variable display game is a small win. Even if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, the big hit pattern random number is loaded. but,
It is also possible to load the small winning design random number (A2911) and acquire the stop design number corresponding to the small winning design random number. In this configuration, when V is won (the result of A3003 in FIG. 10 is "Y")
When it becomes), load the jackpot pattern random number, acquire the stop pattern number, and step A4107
, the processing from A4110 may be executed.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A41
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 2 indicator 5
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped in 2) and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the RWM special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A4107), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4108). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol BG to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 2 is not a small win (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win flag 2 is a big win, that is, the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area. (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4102 and later, but the special figure 2 big hit pattern table and the special figure 2 big hit stop pattern information table that are different from the case of the small hit may be used.

If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N
”), and the support hit flag 2 determines whether or not it is a support hit (A4112). When the support per flag 2 is per support (the result of A4112 is "Y"), load the random number from the special figure 2 per support pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4113), and the special figure 2 per support A pattern table is set (A4114). Then, refer to the special figure 2 support per symbol table, acquire the stop design number corresponding to the loaded random number, and save it in the special figure 2 stop design number area (A4
115). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4116), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( A4117). Thereafter, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and the process proceeds to step A4121.

In the game control device 100, the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N")
, If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N") and the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A4112 is "N"), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is special figure 2 It is saved in the stop symbol number area (A4119), and the lost stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4120). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "big hit" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the process of step A4111 is optional and need not be executed. That is, when the big hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the process of step A4112 may be performed without executing step A4111.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 2 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 2 command area (A4121 ). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4122). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4123), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). ). In addition, when the small hit design random number (A2911) is extracted, the special figure 2 small hit design random number storage area (for reservation number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting processing is ended. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, lost symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 2 display device 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning port 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 detects the game ball. A variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, special figure information setting processing (A340
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like. In addition, based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, etc., the variation may be directly distributed.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A
4201), acquire the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4
202). Next, set the first half variation group selection offset table (A4203)
, To acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop design pattern (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206
). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A
4207), acquire the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4
208). Next, set the second half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4209)
, Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure pending number and the stop symbol pattern (A42
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212
), to end the special figure information setting process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, variation pattern setting processing (A
3406, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A430
1) Acquire the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare it (A4302), and load fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) , prepare (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not lost (result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed and step A
The processing of 4307 is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). after that,
Perform the allocation process (A4315), acquire the first half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, save it in the first half variation number area (A4316), and end the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. 2
The byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores predetermined sorting values in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table.
In the second half fluctuation group table that defines only the second half fluctuation selection table that becomes "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is lost), there is no need for sorting, so the sorting value is "0" , that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of variation pattern random number 1) (A4404)
, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405
Calculate a new random number by subtracting the sorting value from the random number that has already been judged (A44
04), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

In step A4405, the above process is judged to be smaller than "0" (A4
Execute until the result of 405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data address corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A43
15) will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the head data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (
One sorting value initially specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). to calculate a new random number (A45
04), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process moves to step A4503 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505 of the above process, the new random number is set to "0
” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A
3407, A3507) will be described in detail. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (A4600a). If the variation display game to be started is not a special figure 2 variation display game but a special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), clear the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 ( A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4602).
4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460
6), save the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special game processing timer area (A4607)
. After that, prepare a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A4608),
Prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number as an effect command (
A4609), effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). Next, update the special figure pending number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag indicating the fluctuation pattern to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2) by -1 (
A4611), set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination flag (A4
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

First, when the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big win. It is determined whether or not (A4600b). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the variation display game to be started is special figure 1
The processes after step A4601 are executed in the same manner as in the case of the variable display game. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a support hit, step A460
The configuration may be such that the processes after 1 are executed.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a losing result, Save the fluctuation time value (total fluctuation time value) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation count (the execution number of special figure 2 fluctuation display games) after the end of the big hit in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615)
.

Therefore, the fluctuation time value of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are not fixed and set by sorting (lottery), The variation time value of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is a fixed time value set for each special figure 2 variation number after the end of the big hit. That is, the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is subjected to rotation speed control. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 outputs a variation command (MODE, AC
TION) is prepared as an effect command (A4616), and the processing after step A4610 is executed.

It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity open pattern) related to the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the fluctuation time value is the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit In addition, it may be set corresponding to the support state.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command including information about a pattern is mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during special figure fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 is being changed (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A4801). If the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (the result of A4801 is "N"), set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4802).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is during special figure 2 fluctuation (the result of A4801 is "Y")
, It is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit or a big hit (A480
3). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbol (stop display) that is the result of the variable display game. It should be noted that unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is per support, it may be configured to move to the processing of step A4802.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit or a big hit,
That is, in the case of loss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit (
To set the display time corresponding to the number of executions of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are not fixed based on the stop pattern pattern set by lottery, The display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 variation number (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that it is also possible to fix the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit.

In addition, as described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) regarding the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 after the end of the big hit
It may be set corresponding to not only the number of fluctuations but also the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special figure game processing timer area (A4805). Subsequently, the game control device 10
0 judges whether or not it is during general electricity support (during time saving state) (A4806). If the general electric power is not being supported (the result of A4806 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813.
If it is during general electricity support (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A4807). If it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A48
07 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4810.

If the game control device 100 is a variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4807 is "N"), the time reduction variation number 2 is updated by -1 (decrease by 1) (A4808), and the time reduction variation It is determined whether or not the number of times 2 is 0 (A4809). If the time reduction variation number 2 is 0 (the result of A4809 is "Y"), execute the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of the time reduction (
A4812).

The game control device 100, if the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N
”), update the time reduction variation count 1 by −1 (decrease by 1) (A4810), and determine whether or not the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (A4811). If the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 is not 0 (
If the result of A4811 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813. On the other hand, when the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (the result of A4811 is "Y"), the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (A4812). After that, an effect mode information check process, which will be described later, is executed (A4813).

After that, the game control device 100 executes the process shift setting process during special figure display (A4814
). In the special figure displaying process shift setting process, the process number "2" related to the special figure displaying process is set, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area, and the special figure 1 indicator 51 is related to the fluctuation stop. The stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. After that, the process during special figure fluctuation ends.

[Time saving end setting processing]
Next, the details of the time saving end setting process (A4812) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing a procedure of time saving end setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the time saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal related to the time saving end is off data of the big hit 2 signal. As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 .

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is very short or the winning probability of the normal pattern variable display game is very low, so there is no winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the second start memory is does not occur. For this reason, at the time of the time saving end, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory,
When the special figure 2 hold) remains as the remaining hold, the output of the on-data of the jackpot 2 signal is continued (this does not cause any inconvenience), and the special figure fluctuation display game related to the last remaining hold is performed. When the variable display stops, the off data of the two jackpot signals (signal relating to the end of time saving) may be output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of RWM (A4902). As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as a test signal to the test-firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, normal electric role They are OFF data of the object 1 open extended state signal and OFF data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area of RWM (A4903), save the low probability & no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area of RWM (A4904), RWM special game Save special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the mode flag area (A4905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the RWM time reduction variation frequency 1 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 1 is stored (A4906), and the RWM time reduction variation frequency 2 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 2 is stored. is cleared (A4907). Then, R
Save in the test signal output data area of WM (A4908), play state display number 2 of RWM
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (A4909).

After that, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state judgment area of RWM (A49
10). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating a normal game state, which is a period during which a base value (ball output rate in a normal game state) is calculated. After that, the time saving end setting process is ended.

Thus, by executing the time saving end setting process, appropriately from the time saving state (state with low probability of special figure and general electricity support) normally game state (state without special figure low probability and general electricity support)
can be transferred to

[Production mode information check process]
Next, the details of the production mode information check process (A4813) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flow chart showing the procedure of effect mode information check processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and the effect mode is selected to continue until the next big hit, for example.

Also, the game control device 100, if the next mode transition information is not an update no code (A50
The result of 01 is "N") updates the number of remaining rotations of the effect which is the executable number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode by -1 (A5002), Whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect has become 0 (A5003). Here, the number of rotations remaining in the effect is updated by -1 only when the main special figure variation display game is executed this time, but is also updated by -1 when it is not the main variation display game. Configurations are also possible.

One of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is determined as the main variation display game according to the game state and the like. For example, the main variation display game (main variation display game) is the one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that is frequently executed, and the variation display game that is not the main variation display game (secondary variation display game) is a special figure 1
It is the one that is not frequently executed between the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the effect control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating a main variable display game according to the game state or the like.

If the effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the production becomes 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, when the production mode is shifted from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (A5004). , acquires the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be shifted, and RW
Save it in the production mode number area in M (A5006), obtain the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted, and save it in the production remaining rotation number area in RWM (A5007)
, acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

In addition, when the production mode is shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining pending number is the number of special figures 2 pending (remaining pending) that are digested after the time saving state ends, and is the number of special figures 2 fluctuations after the time saving ends. Remaining suspension is caused by winning a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 that is opened by a normal game hit during the time saving state. In this way, it is possible to set the remaining reservation digestion mode (FIG. 54) as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the production mode is transferred when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 opened by the normal game in the time saving state (corresponding to the latter half opening described later) is completed, the production of the production mode to be transferred remains. You may set the number of rotations (initial value) to the special figure 2 reservation number at that time. As a result, after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is opened by the normal game in the time saving state, is completed, the mode after the normal electric open end (Fig. 54A) is set as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 pending. Can be set. Furthermore, in this case, the number of production remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted by the end of the time saving state (the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 or 2 = 0) is a predetermined value according to the number of times of time reduction (for example, the number of times of time reduction from 6 subtracted value) to set the pre-commercial power disconnection mode (FIG. 54A).

Furthermore, when the production mode is switched by the end of the time saving state (time reduction fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the special figure 2 at that time
It may be set to a predetermined number below the number of reservations or the number of special 2 reservations. In this way, as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation number or the predetermined number of remaining reservations (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory) at the end of time saving, the remaining reservation digestion mode (Fig. 54B) can be set. The remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the production mode that shifts after the remaining hold digestion mode during the time saving is set to the specified number of remaining holds (
For example, it can be set to a value (excessive hold number) obtained by subtracting the number of remaining holds digested in the time saving generated remaining hold digestion mode from 10). In this way, it is possible to set the excess retention digestion mode (FIG. 54B) as the production mode after the time saving remaining retention digestion mode.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on the presence or absence of time saving, and information on the production mode) corresponding to the newly set production mode number as a production command (A5009). , determines whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (result of A5010 is "N"), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5011 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A5013), and executes effect command setting processing (A5014
). Thereby, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 can acquire the production|presentation remaining rotation speed. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count 2 is prepared as an effect command (A50
15), effect command setting processing (A5016) is executed. Thereby, the production control device 3
00 can acquire the number of time reduction fluctuations 2. Note that the game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as an effect command and execute the effect command setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode when a new effect mode number is acquired in step A5006 (A5017).
If it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, in the case of left-handed mode (result of A5017 is "Y")
, the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5018), the effect command setting process is executed (A5019), and the effect mode information check process is terminated.

In addition, in the above, the determination result (A500
Regardless of 3), the production rotation speed command corresponding to the updated production remaining rotation speed (A5002) and the time reduction fluctuation frequency command corresponding to the updated time reduction fluctuation frequency 1, 2 (A4808, A4810) are also production commands. , and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during special figure display. FIG. 26A shows the first half of the processing during special figure display, and FIG. 26B shows the second half of the processing during special figure display.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (A5101). That is, it is determined whether or not the display of the stop symbol (stop display) is related to the special figure 1 variable display game. If the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (the result of A5101 is "Y"), load the jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and load the jackpot flag 1 determines whether it is a big hit (A5
104).

When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, the game control device 100 (A5104
result is "Y"), conditional device activation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device activation information area (A5105), and the process proceeds to step A5106. When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "N"), step A511
Move to the process of 1.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a special figure normal process transition setting process (A5106).
. In the special figure normal processing shift setting process, 0 is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the fluctuation symbol determination flag area is cleared. After that, the processing during special figure display is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 (A510
The result of 1 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 is loaded (A5107), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5108). It is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5109). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A5109 is "Y"),
The conditional device activation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device activation information area (A5110), and the process proceeds to step A5106. If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a loss, step A5
111 processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the processing from step A5107 to A5110 is optional and need not be executed. That is, after step A5101, the processing of step A5111 may be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the special figure high probability (during the variable probability state) (A5111). When not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5111 is "N"), whether there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed has reached the ceiling number (time reduction ceiling) Determine (A5112).

If the game control device 100 does not have a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"
), the ceiling counter value in the RWM ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (A51
13). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the special figure variation display game (including the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game) has reached the ceiling number (A5114). For example, the ceiling count is 500 times. When reaching the ceiling number (result of A5114 is "Y")
, Set (turn on) a ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs and a ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached (A5115). In addition, it is also possible to configure the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag collectively as one flag.

In addition, the ceiling time-saving activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are cleared when a big hit occurs, but are not cleared unless a big hit occurs. Therefore, once the ceiling number of times is reached, if the number of times of working hours ends without a big hit, the ceiling time saving activation flag and the ceiling reached flag remain set (on), so that the ceiling time saving will not occur thereafter. and the ceiling counter value is not updated.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (in the probability variable state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), the number of times of ceiling (The result of A5114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (A5116).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5117
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5118). Then, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded as a production command from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (A5119), and the production command setting process is executed (A5120). After that, a small hit opening pre-processing shift setting process is executed (A5121), and the process during special figure display is ended.

In the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small hit opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area, and the time before opening the small hit (for example, 300m
s) is saved in the special game processing timer area. In addition, the signal regarding the start of the small winning game (
For example, turning on the jackpot 1 signal (output at jackpot and minor hit)) is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, that is, if the result of A5116 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs. (A5122). If there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (the result of A5122 is "Y"), save the initial value that will be the ceiling time saving number (time saving number of times due to ceiling time saving) in the time reduction fluctuation number 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 area (A5123 ). The initial values (for example, 704 times and 700 times) of the time reduction variation frequency 1 and the time reduction variation frequency 2 in the case of the ceiling time reduction described above are saved here. The initial value may be determined by lottery. Subsequently, in order to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving, support operation setting processing is executed (A5127), special figure normal processing transition setting processing is executed (A5128), and processing during special figure display is completed. In the special figure normal process shift setting process, the process number "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

Game control device 100, if there is no ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs (the result of A5122 is "N"), the support hit flag 2 determines whether it is a support hit (
A5124). And if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5124 is "
N"), and the support hit flag 1 determines whether or not it is a support hit (A5125).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data to the time reduction variation count. Save to 1 area and 2 areas of time reduction variation count (A5126)
. The initial values (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) of the time reduction fluctuation number 1 and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 in the case of the support hit result (sudden time reduction) are saved here It will be. Subsequently, in order to generate a time-saving state (suddenly time-saving) by the time-saving design, the support operation setting process is executed (A5127), and the special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (A5128).
, To end the special figure display process.

In addition, the time reduction determination data is set corresponding to the stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503). The value (that is, the number of times of time saving) will be determined by lottery based on the pattern random numbers per support.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hit (the result of A5124 and A5125 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support operation setting process for setting the time saving, Usually, the process transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the process during special figure display is terminated.

As described above, in the processing during special figure display, setting of time saving such as setting of time saving number of times (that is, initial value of time saving variation number of times) is executed with respect to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving. In addition, time saving setting such as setting of the number of times of working hour saving is executed in the jackpot end processing with respect to time saving by the big hit, that is, time saving starting from the end of the big hit state.

In addition, the special figure display process is executed when the special figure game processing timer set by the stop display time (A4805) reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), so the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game It will be executed when the display ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game ends (substantially equal when starting the next special figure fluctuation display game if it starts), the number of time reduction fluctuations (A5123, A5126) is set, Time saving state due to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving starts.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) in the process during special figure display will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the time saving start in the external information output data area (A5701). As a result, at the time of sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving pattern (per support) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, a signal related to time saving start is external information terminal 71 as external information
As a result, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the time saving start is the ON data of the big hit 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (A5702). This timer initial value becomes the time for outputting the big win 3 signal by the later-described external information editing process.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving start in the test signal output data area (A5703). As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving, a signal relating to the start of time saving is output as a test signal to the test firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving start here is, for example, the ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation ON data of the time shortening state signal and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. Then, save the number with short working hours in the game state display number area (A5704), save the high probability & short working hours flag in the general game mode flag area (A5705), and save the special figure in the special game mode flag area A time saving flag is synthesized (A5706). Subsequently, a signal relating to right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and a right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (A5709), special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) or special figure 2
The address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (A3503) is acquired (A5710), and the effect mode number of the effect mode (the effect mode number) is acquired based on the table and saved ( A5711). As a result, you can select the production mode that shifts to the beginning of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) based on the table (A5712). For example, the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) is the number of times of reduction in time (initial value of the number of times of reduction in time 1 or the number of times of reduction in time 2). Thereby, for example, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the next mode transition information, which is the information about the transition to the next mode of the production mode during the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction, based on the table (A5
713). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A5714), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5715 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5716). here,
The probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A5717), and executes an effect command setting process (A5718).
Then, the time reduction variation frequency command corresponding to each of the time reduction variation frequency 1 and the time reduction variation frequency 2 (here, the initial value of the time reduction frequency) is prepared as an effect command (A5719
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5720).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5721),
The effect mode transition information area is cleared (A5722), and the big hit ending process is terminated.

[Accessory game processing]
Next, details of the accessory game process (A1312b) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory game process. In the accessory game process, the overall process relating to the big win state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes a lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A5601).
. In the lower big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the accessory game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A5602). By updating -1, the accessory game processing timer counts the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the role game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the accessory game processing is terminated.

When the accessory game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "
Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the role game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the role game process number is set in the register (A5604). . Further, using the role product game sequence branch table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the role product game process number is acquired (A5605).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the accessory game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the accessory game processing number (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A5606, the game control device 100
Accessory normal processing for performing settings at the start of the jackpot, etc. is executed (A5607). For example, in the role product normal processing, in a predetermined case, the processing number "1" relating to the fanfare mid-process is set and saved in the role product game processing number area. The details of the accessory normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29 .

If the game processing number is "1" at step A5606, the game control device 100
Processing during fanfare is executed (A5608). For example, during fanfare processing,
Set the processing number "2" for the processing during the interval and save it in the role game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A5606, the game control device 100
During interval processing is executed (A5609). For example, in the interval process, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the opening time of the lower grand prize opening is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the ON data is saved in the lower grand prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is issued. It is set as a performance command, a process number "3" relating to the process during jackpot opening is set, and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing for setting the ending command, and the processing during the jackpot opening, such as the setting of the information necessary to perform the processing for the remaining balls in the big winning opening. (A5610). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, a process number "4" relating to the jackpot remaining ball process is set, and saved in the role game process number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing of setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing, etc. are executed. (A5611). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball processing, if the final round is not the last round, the interval time is saved in the role game processing timer area, and the processing number "2" relating to the processing during the interval is set and saved in the role game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the role product game processing timer area, the processing number "5" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the role product game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A5606, the game control device 100
Execute jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing accessory normal processing (A
5612). For example, in the jackpot end processing, based on the time reduction determination data including the information of the presence or absence of the time saving state after the jackpot end (with or without time saving), after the jackpot state ends Set the information, and process number "0" related to the usual processing of accessories
is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area.

[Routine processing of accessories]
Next, the details of the character product normal processing (A5607) in the aforementioned character product game processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the condition device is in operation (A5801
). If the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004,
A5005, A5010), that is, there is jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or there is a prize in the specific area 86 (V prize opening) (input to the specific area switch 72, V prize) , it can be determined that the conditional device is active. If the conditional device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the usual character processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the condition device is in operation (result of A5801 is "Y")
, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is saved in the round number upper limit area (A5802). Subsequently, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), the probability information command (normal medium) is prepared as an effect command (A5804), and the effect command setting process is executed. Run(
A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as an effect command (A5806), and executes effect command setting processing (A58
07). Then, load the decoration special command (decoration special command 1 command or decoration special command 2 command) from the decoration special command area of the special command that became the big hit or small hit this time, prepare it as a production command (A5808), and produce Command setting processing is executed (A5809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). . Then save the initial value in the round number area (A
5812). The initial value is 0 when the conditional device is in operation according to the jackpot information, and is 1 when the conditional device is in operation due to winning in the specific area 86 (V winning).

Next, the game control device 100 executes processing transition setting processing during fanfare (A581
3), end the normal processing of the accessory. For example, in the mid-fanfare process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number relating to the mid-fanfare process, the process number is saved in the role game process number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the role game process timer area. .

In the process transition setting process during the fanfare, the game control device 100 has a time shortening variation frequency 1 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 1 is stored, a time shortening variation frequency 2 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 2 is stored, and a ceiling counter value Clear the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter area is stored, the ceiling time saving activation flag area where the ceiling time saving activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the normal low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area, and the special low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special game mode flag area.

Furthermore, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, the game control device 100 turns on a signal related to the start of a big win (special game state) (for example, turns on a big win 1 signal (outputs with a big win and a small win), turns on a big win 4 signal (big win )) is saved in the external information output data area. And, a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off,
Special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal pattern 1
Turn off the variable time shortening state signal and turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal) are saved in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (A5612) in the aforementioned accessory game processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with time reduction (A6001). Data with time saving indicates that it will be in a time saving state (general electric support state) after the end of the jackpot state. The data without time saving indicates that the time saving state (general electric support state) does not occur after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 in order to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big win (A6002), and the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction. In the case of data, a jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to a time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6004), and the effect mode transition information (A4010,
A4110) is obtained (A6005), and the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot state is obtained and saved (A6006). As a result, it is possible to select the performance mode to be shifted after the big hit is completed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) is the number of times of time saving (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) or the total number of times of time saving and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (for example, 10 times). Thereby, for example, after the big hit ends, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends or until all the special figure 2 variable display games related to the remaining reservation are executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about transition to the next mode of the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6009). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A6009), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6010 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the information of the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A6012), and executes an effect command setting process (A6013).
And the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, the number of time reductions that is the initial value, for example, 5 times or less or 99
time) is prepared as a production command (A6014),
An effect command setting process is executed (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the effect mode transition information area (A6016),
Accessory product usual processing shift setting processing is executed (A6017), and the big hit end processing is ended. In the character object normal processing transition setting processing, in order to shift to the character object normal processing, the processing number "0" related to the character object normal processing is set, the processing number is saved in the character object game processing number area, and the condition device operation information is set. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal off data, the jackpot 3 signal off data, and the jackpot 4 signal off data are output as external information. Save to data area. Since the jackpot end setting process 1 is a process when there is no time saving after the jackpot state ends, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display portion 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204), and saves the special figure time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A6
205). Then, the time reduction variation count area is cleared (A6206), and the collective display device 50
As display data of the first game state display portion 57 (lamp D7), the number in the left hitting state is saved in the game state display number 1 area (A6207), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the big win in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal regarding the end of the big win in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device through the external information terminal 71, the OFF data of the jackpot 1 signal, the OFF data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the OFF data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). Since the jackpot end setting process 2 is a process in the case of entering the time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot state ends, the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of the time saving. (In this embodiment, since the 2 jackpot signals are output from the jackpot state, the ON state of the 2 jackpot signals continues).

Next, the game control device 100 displays the second game state display section 58 (lamp D
17) Save the number during the time saving in the game state display number 2 area as the display data (A640
5), save the high probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6406), and save the flag during the special time saving in the special game mode flag area (A6407).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has become a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold has become a big hit (
A6408). If the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit or if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit during the time saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the stop pattern pattern ( Alternatively, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) corresponding to the stop pattern number, patterns A to F described later) is saved (A6409), and the processing after step A6411 is executed. Here, the time reduction variation count initial value (time reduction count) is the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). It should be noted that in step A6409, the
In addition to the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number), the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 (
A second predetermined number of times described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time shortening variation number 1 may be the initial value of the time shortening variation number 2 plus the maximum value (eg 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold becomes a big hit (the result of A6408 is "
Y"), save the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number, 99 here) in the time reduction fluctuation number area (A6410). Also here, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) is the initial value of the number of times of reduction fluctuation 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). Note that in step A6410,
In addition to the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency 2 for the time reduction variation frequency 2 (time reduction frequency), the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency 1 (second predetermined number described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time reduction variation count 1 is the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2, the maximum value of the special figure 1 pending number (first start memory number) (
For example, it may be obtained by adding 4).

After that, the game control device 100 displays a stop symbol pattern (or a stop symbol number, a symbol A to be described later).
-G), the type of the support state (support mode, general power open pattern), which is the state (mode) of the general power support, is saved in the support state area (A6411). Note that step A6411
is an option, and is executed when the support state regarding the form (content) of the general electricity support is variable, as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 displays the first game state display section 57 (lamp D
As the display data of 7), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 1 area (A6
412), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6413), effect command setting processing is executed (A6414), and big hit end setting processing 2 is terminated.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal game processing. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the normal map, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the general electric winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during normal pattern fluctuation. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later.

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 sets the normal pattern open time, performs normal pattern winning process. (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, the normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation control processing by the normal pattern display device 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal pattern game processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
result is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A7702). The gaming state for hitting to the right is a jackpot state and a time-saving state (general electric support state). If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes the notification (warning) to instruct left-handed hitting on the display device 41 or the like by left-handed instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). When the number of reserved normal patterns is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating (executing) or in a per normal pattern state. It is determined whether or not (A7706). When neither the normal pattern fluctuation display game nor the normal pattern hit state (the result of A7706 is "N")
, update the number of reserved general patterns by +1 (A7707). In this way, the normal pattern suspension number is updated by +1 only when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or the normal pattern per state is not in effect. does not accumulate substantially and becomes 1 instantaneously only immediately before the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts (the normal pattern pending number is substantially 0).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the number of normal pattern reservations after the update (A7708). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is finished.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), Or, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating or in the normal pattern per state (A7
If the result of 706 is "Y"), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric prize switch monitoring process (A7602) in the general/universal diagram game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general electric winning switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation prize winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). And if it is in the middle of the normal pattern (the result of A7801 is "Y")
, start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the count number of the general electric counter after updating to an upper limit value (for example,
10) is reached (A7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM, and the normal hit end pointer value in the RWM is It is saved in the per figure middle control pointer area (A7805).

Finally, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the general-purpose electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. That is, when there is a normal electric winning prize equal to or greater than the upper limit value during the winning state of the normal pattern, the winning end value is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal pattern winning at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. It is made to end the hit state of the normal figure on the way.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the normal game (the result of A7801 is "N"), if it is determined that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N") ), or if it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit (A780
4 result is "N"), the general electric prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A7901).
. If the number of reserved patterns is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per pattern of RWM. (
Load the per pattern random number from the reservation number 1), and after loading, clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 (A7902) . In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7903). In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers per hit is 0 to 250, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 251/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.
is. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the normal pattern per probability in the low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7904
), in the case of normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0) which is the lower limit judgment value in normal pattern high probability (A7905), step A7906 to process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
If not, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

The game control device 100 hits when the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908)
. Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the win information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop design number corresponding to the loaded hit design random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop design number is set. The stop design information is saved in the normal design stop design information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In this case, there is one type of hit stop pattern (normal hit pattern), but there may be several types in a modified example which will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A791
4), save the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal pattern (A7916), clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917
), and the number of reserved charts is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 1 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1 and becomes 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the information of the support state (support mode, electric power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional, and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A7920). It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern), which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable, set a variable normal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support state and save it in the normal game processing timer area. And, during the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A7921), the normal figure usual process is terminated. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), set "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal normal processing (A7922),
The process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal pattern fluctuation. The process shift setting process during the normal pattern fluctuation is executed at step A7921 in the normal pattern normal process.

The game control device 100, first, "1" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal pattern fluctuation
(A8101), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8102
).

After that, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern 1
Save the fluctuation signal on) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and save the fluctuation flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (
A8104). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (A8105), and set the initial value (here, 0) to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number area. Save (A8106). After that, the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7609) in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the processing during normal game display (A8301), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (normal pattern stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern game processing timer area ( A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (A8
305), end the processing during normal pattern fluctuation.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (A7610) in the general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal processing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A84
02). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A8403).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is set in the winning flag (A8403
The result is "Y"), set the processing setting table during the hit (A8404), acquire the hit start pointer value (here 0) corresponding to the normal pattern stop pattern information, and save it in the control pointer area during the normal pattern (A8405). In addition, it acquires the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information, and saves it in the normal pattern per end pointer area (A8406). Next, the general electric open time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8407). Normal fluctuation winning device 3 in the time saving state by the above processing
7 opening modes are set, and for example, two openings are possible. In addition, the normal pattern stop pattern (
General pattern per pattern) is one type, and the hit start pointer value, the hit end pointer value, and the general electric open time are fixed, but as in the modification example described later, the support state related to general electric support (support mode, If the electric open pattern) is variable, the hit start pointer value corresponding to the support state,
You may set the hit end pointer value, general electric open time, and save it in the general game processing timer area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "3
” (A8408), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A840
9). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 per medium signal is turned on)
Then, the signal related to the start of normal electric operation (turn on the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). In addition, in order to output a signal to drive (turn on) the common solenoid, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8411).
.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the general electrical count area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), Clear the stored information in the electric fraudulent winning number area (A8413). Finally, a flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

The game control device 100 hits the hit flag when the information is not set (A840
The result of 3 is "N"), and set "0" as the processing number to shift to normal processing (A
8415), and save the process number in the normal game process number area (A8416). after that,
Save the fraud monitoring period flag in the general electricity fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and end the general map display process.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (A7611) during the normal pattern per game in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during normal per pattern.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal pattern (A860
1), it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer has reached the upper limit value of the normal pattern per per control pointer (hit end pointer value) (A8602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N") , the control pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, normal electric operation transition setting processing is executed (A8604), and processing during the normal pattern per is ended. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "Y")
, Without executing the process of updating (+1) the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step A8603, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal pattern hit ends.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal per normal process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the processing according to the value of the control pointer (the control pointer during normal game per game) (A8701). Note that here, the control pointer is the
Use the value before updating with . Examples of control pointers are shown in FIGS. 56, 72 and 73 described below. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, so the wait after closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is performed. Time (electrical interval time, e.g. 60000msec
) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8702). It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electrical release pattern) related to the general electrical support is variable,
A wait time (general electric interval time) may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets OFF data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer The general electric open time, which is the opening time of the winning device 37, is saved in the general game processing timer area (A8704). The normal/current disconnect time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (for example, 3000 msec). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8705), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 10
0 sets "4" as the processing number in order to move to step A8706 to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and execute the normal electric remaining ball processing (A7612) (A8706
), and the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8709
), the normal electric operation transition setting process is terminated. In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the later-described modified example, the normal electric remaining ball processing time may be set according to the support state.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the general electric remaining ball processing (A7612) in the general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric residual bulb processing.

Game control device 100, first, sets the processing number "5" related to the end processing per normal pattern (A8
901), the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the modification described later, the general drawing ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turns off the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A8904).
Subsequently, clear the general electrical count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A
8905), and clears the control pointer area during normal per figure (A8906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the general pattern per end process (A7613) in the general pattern game process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal pattern end process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number “0” relating to the general pattern normal processing (A910
1) Furthermore, the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A9102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal pattern variation game (the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (in-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104),
After that, end processing per normal figure ends.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 44A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 44B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (A1307), winning opening switch /
State monitoring process (A1310), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (
A1316), based on the monitoring results, creates information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement center internal management device, or a test firing test device, and performs processing such as setting it in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (
A9501). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"),
Determine whether a body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502)
. If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

The game control device 100, when a glass frame open error is occurring (result of A9501 is "Y"), or when a body frame open error is occurring (result of A9502 is "Y"),
The ON data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9507), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is stored in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102).
A predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in is initialized (A1044 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A
9509), and shifts to the processing of step A9510. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). If there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). If there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio fraud is occurring.

Game control device 100, when board radio fraud is not occurring (result of A9511 is "N")
Furthermore, it is determined whether frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). If there is a frame radio wave fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not big winning mouth fraud is occurring (A9513). Incidentally, when a fraudulent prize winning occurrence flag relating to the big prize mouth is saved in the fraud flag area by the prize winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the big prize mouth fraud is occurring. If the big winning slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electricity fraud is occurring (A9514). Incidentally, when the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the second starting winning port of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraud flag area by the winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the electric fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the vibration fraud is occurring (A9515) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"). Incidentally, when there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that the vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A95
16). If the abnormal discharge flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If the game control device 100 does not cause an abnormal discharge error (the result of A9516 is "N
”), and it is determined whether or not a V passage error is occurring (A9517). If the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passage error is occurring. If the V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9517 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (A9518). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9518 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9519).

The game control device 100 saves the OFF data of the game machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9520) when a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9519 is "N"). . If a switch abnormality error is occurring (
If the result of A9519 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522).

On the other hand, if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y
”), if board radio fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”), if frame radio fraud is occurring (result of A9512 is “Y”), major winning mouth fraud is occurring case (A95
If the result of A9514 is "Y"), if the electricity fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y"), or if the vibration fraud is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), an abnormal ejection error occurs. If it is (result of A9516 is "Y"), if a V passing error is occurring (result of A9517 is "Y"), if a remaining ball error is occurring (result of A9518 is "Y") ), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9521), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 .

After steps A9520 and A9522, the game control device 100 executes starting gate signal editing processing for editing the winning signal of the starting gate (A9523). Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9524), and a symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game is determined is transmitted to the external device. Executes design determination number signal editing processing to be output to (A9525).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (A95
26), it is determined whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9527). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (result of A9527 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9527 is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9528), and the external information editing process ends.

In this way, at the time of sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the 3 jackpot signals is sent to the game hall internal management device (hall computer).
and other external devices via the external information terminal 71 . Here, the ON data of the big hit 3 signal is output during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5702 of the support operation setting process. The conventional jackpot 1-4 signals are output during the jackpot period, but the jackpot 3 signal is output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) much shorter than the jackpot period.
Therefore, the external device (hall computer, etc.) can recognize that the time reduction has occurred due to the ceiling time reduction due to the number of ceiling times or the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern without confusing it with the big win or the time reduction following the big win.

In addition, as described above, the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time in the jackpot state and the time saving state following the jackpot state (time saving state due to the jackpot, first specific game state, first time saving state). Output as external information. The short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) jackpot 3 signal is external information indicating the occurrence of a time saving state (second specific game state, second time saving state) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving state caused by a big hit It is output to the external device separately from the external information (2 long-time jackpot signals), and is not confused with the external device.

As another configuration, only one of the ceiling time saving and the sudden time saving may output three jackpot signals for a fixed time at the start of the time saving. In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving, in one time saving, during the fixed time at the start of the time saving, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4
Both signals may be output, and only the jackpot 3 signal may be output in the other short time. For example, 3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals may be output for the ceiling time saving, and only 3 jackpot signals may be output for the sudden time saving (or vice versa). In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving, at the time of the start of the time saving, output 3 jackpot signals (or 4 jackpot signals) for the ceiling time saving,
You may output 4 jackpot signals (or 3 jackpot signals) for sudden time saving. In this way, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving so that the external device can recognize it.

[Transmission of external information or test signal]
FIG. 45 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted.

Figure 45 (A) is the last special figure variation display game in the previous time saving state (special figure variation display game reaching the number of times of time saving), there is a ceiling number of times and stop of the time saving pattern, and the next special figure variation display It shows a case of a time saving state after the game (time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time saving state ends is the timing at which the time saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 24) is executed within the special figure fluctuation processing, that is, the previous special figure fluctuation display This is the timing when the variable display of the game stops. In addition, the timing when the later time saving state (ceiling time saving and sudden time saving) starts is the number of time reduction fluctuations (A5
12, A5126) is set, that is, the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends (substantially equal to the timing to start if the next special figure fluctuation display game starts).

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variation display game stops, the time saving end setting processing in the special figure variation processing will cause the off data of the 2 jackpot signals as a signal related to the time saving end to be placed in the external information output data area. It is set and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and as a signal related to the time saving end, a fluctuation time reduction state signal (special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A4902). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variable display game is stopped (after the previous time saving is finished).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving start is set in the external information output data area by the support operation setting process. (Hall computer, etc.) (A5701), and as a signal related to the start of time saving, the fluctuation time reduction state signal (special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal)
is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A5703). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned on after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends.

In this way, when the special figure fluctuation display game (the previous special figure fluctuation display game) in which the time saving ends has just reached the ceiling number or stopped with the time saving pattern, it is clear that the time saving has ended once. become. In addition, the output of external information (2 jackpot signals) and test signals (variation time reduction state signal, etc.) is turned off for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop pattern), thereby reducing time. When restarting, the ON state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the conventional gaming machine, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the time saving ends by the time saving end setting process in the special figure display processing. do. In the time saving end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving end is set in the external information output data area and output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the variable time reduction state as a signal related to the time saving end Signal OFF data and the like are set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends. However, at this timing, the support operation setting process immediately turns on the 2 jackpot signals and the variable time shortening state signal, so they are not substantially turned off (
the on state remains substantially continuous). Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, in the conventional gaming machine, it becomes unclear when the time saving has ended, and when the time saving resumes, the ON state of the output of the external information and the test signal becomes unclear.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 46
A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300 . The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). Effect control device 300 sets a time timer (clock means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM,
RT only once when time information is read from RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on
When the time information is read from the C338, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC338. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and sound volume by the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46B.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 46A) will be described with reference to FIG. 46B. FIG. 46B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
”), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46C. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 46B) will be described with reference to FIG. 46C. 46C is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, and there is, for example, a variation command. Then, if the MODE part indicates a variable command (result of B1205 is "Y"), variable command processing is executed (B1206
), and terminates the received command analysis process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
(B
1207). The hit-related commands are commands for commanding operations (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to effects during a big win or a small win. They are a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, an ending command for commanding an ending screen, and the like. If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a hit system command (B12
(B
1209). In addition, the symbol-based commands include, for example, a decoration special figure 1 command and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, if the MODE part indicates a look-ahead pattern command (the result of B1213 is "Y
”), executes the look-ahead pattern-based command processing (B1214), and terminates the received command analysis processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). Prefetch variation commands include, for example, prefetch variation pattern commands. If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command ( B1305). For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery system command (B13
05 result is "Y"), the power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B13
07 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-off command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). In addition, as error/fraud commands, for example, fraud occurrence command, fraud release command, state off command, state on command, magnet fraud notification command (magnetism error command), board radio wave fraud notification command (board radio wave error command) be.
As fraud occurrence commands, there are commands indicating the occurrence of fraudulent winning based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43. The fraud cancellation command is a command indicating the cancellation of fraud. In the winning slot switch/state monitoring process (A1310), occurrence of fraudulent prize winning and fraud cancellation are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and fraud cancellation command can be transmitted. As a state ON command, the generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) or the front frame open detection switch 64 (
There is a command that indicates the generation of a signal (body frame open error, front frame open error) from the body frame open detection switch). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred. A state ON command and a state OFF command may be sent in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process (A1310). When there is detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1315). When there is detection (radio fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio fraud notification command is transmitted in radio fraud monitoring processing (A1316).

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the error/invalidity setting process, settings are made so that an error or invalidity notification sound is generated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the processing when the number of out-balls is received is executed (B1
320), ending the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
If the result of 1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command 1046 for recovery from power failure and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a probability setting change command (A
1030). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1033). When the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation command (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). and MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 47 in single-shot command processing. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a time reduction variation number command, effect rotation speed command, hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction notification command, right hitting instruction notification command) etc. from the game control device 100, and the command may be processed. The production control device 300 can acquire the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state from the time reduction fluctuation number command (time reduction fluctuation number) or the like, and can acquire the production remaining number of rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command or the like, and the time reduction state. Effect can be set based on the remaining number of fluctuations in , the number of rotations remaining in each effect mode, and the like. The production control device 300 displays a hitting instruction display (left hitting instruction display or right hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to hit in response to a hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction information command or right hitting instruction information command). )
can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the prefetch pattern system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 48 shows the performance control device 3
00 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a look-ahead symbol system command process.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag indicating that the look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (B160
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the details of the look-ahead variation command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 49 shows the production control device 3
00 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variation command process.

Production control device 300, first, look-ahead variation system command (look-ahead variation pattern command)
(B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is the design of the latest pending information (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
(B1703), and acquire the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE part (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command
part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If the CT part is both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the MODE part after conversion and the A
The command after conversion composed of the CT part is saved in the latest pending information and the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) corresponding to the number of reservations (B1708). Then, the read-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9) Determine whether the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same system,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. For example, even in normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop failure and normal reach +1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , if the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the read-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), load the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area (B1711), and execute the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the look-ahead effect that occurs is not the effect that starts immediately (B1715
result is "N"), the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect during the hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the number of holds is reduced) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), ends the prefetch variation system command processing as it is.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a special figure 1 jackpot pattern A, a special figure 2 jackpot pattern BF, a jackpot pattern G in the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation), a time saving pattern ( It corresponds to support per pattern) etc.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of variation-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 51) described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) (B2002), corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of special figure type Acquire the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the variable command (variable command) M
The address of the first half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is obtained (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is obtained (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, for example, the display (display of the pending shift) that the pending display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set is set (B2015). Next, set the audio number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker, and the decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device (B2016).
). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) includes a plurality of decoration light emitting units (decoration LED
etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), in addition to the above-described first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). note that,
The fourth pattern variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning system command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the win-related command is a big-win fanfare command or a small-win fanfare command, fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare effect. (B2102). In addition, corresponding to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, the display device 41 or the like may display (announce) the display of the hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the upper limit of the number of rounds is
It can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, (B2105, B21
06), the winning system command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
result is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 The status flag is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the winning system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate an interval (B2107
result is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B21
10 is "Y"), that is, when the winning command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current game state of the gaming machine 10. Ending is set in the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the win system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the ending (B2
If the result of 110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the winning command process without executing any process.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (transitions) by the game control of the game control device 100 . The game states are particularly shown to be transitioned by the occurrence of a big win, or by the passage of a predetermined number of games (the number of rotations, the number of fluctuations) as a trigger. In FIG. 54A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special pattern probability), the state of the normal pattern probability (normal pattern probability) that is the probability of the winning result of the normal pattern variation display game, the production mode, the main Features such as a different variation display game (main variation display game, main variation), right-handed or left-handed shooting mode, etc. are shown.

Incidentally, the production mode (production stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end processing (FIG. 30), the production mode information check processing (FIG. 25B), etc., as described above. However, not limited to this, the effect control device 300 can also be set based on the number of times of time saving, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit, and the like.

In addition, in FIG. 54A, specific game states B and C (time saving mode #3, #4) in the case of sudden time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving design due to reaching the ceiling number of times are omitted (similar to FIG. 54B), but will be described later. will be described in detail in the third embodiment (FIG. 88) of FIG.

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

In addition, since the jackpot probability and normal pattern probability in the transition state do not change from the normal game state,
Probabilistically, the transition state may be included in the normal game state. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game. However, in the transition state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed by the digestion of the remaining reservation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation display game, and the V passing (to the V winning opening) in the small hit and the small hit A big hit by the passage of the game ball, V prize) occurs with a small hit probability (1/8). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. Further, the transition state and the specific game state (time saving state) may be put together as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific game state (time saving state) may be the first advantageous state and the transition state may be the second advantageous state. state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100
The probability of hitting the jackpot is low (low probability of special pattern), and the probability of hitting the normal pattern is also low (low probability of normal pattern).
In the present embodiment, the normal low probability state is assumed to be a state without general electric support (no support state), and the normal low probability state is assumed to be a general electric support state (supported state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened due to the general pattern in the state with support, if the probability is low when the general pattern is opened, there is no support state. becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration is also possible in which the support state is regarded as being present while the normal variable prize winning device 37 is open.

Also, in the normal game state, the production mode is the normal mode. In the normal game state, left-handed hitting that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 36 is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as a mode of shooting the game ball. The main starting area where the game ball is likely to win in the recommended shooting mode is the first start winning opening 36, and the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation special figure) becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The sub-starting area where the game ball is difficult to win in the recommended shooting mode becomes the normal variable winning device 37, and the sub-variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be a low probability state, but the normal pattern hit probability to be a high probability (normal pattern high probability). In the specific game state, as the shooting mode of the game ball, the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, and the right hitting aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 1 variable display game.

Also, in the specific game state, if the number of times of time saving is less than the reference number of times (here 5 times) (
There are cases where the number of times of time saving is ≤ 5) and 99 times larger than the reference number of times (number of times of time saving = 99). The performance mode in the case of the number of times of time saving ≤ 5 is set to the time saving mode #1, the performance mode in the case of the number of times of working time = 99 is set to the time saving mode #2, and the performance modes of the time saving mode #1 and the time saving mode #2 are made different to play the game. may improve the interest of In addition, the reference number of times may be, for example, a reciprocal value (8 times) of the probability of a small hit of 1/8, and may be 7 times or the like. The smaller the reference number of times, the less likely it is that a small hit will occur in the time-saving mode #1 (the one that becomes a big hit state by passing the V in the small hit), while the production mode #2.
The difference is bigger and the sharpness comes out.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of the specific game state (time saving state). In the transition state, the remaining hold caused by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) opened by the normal game win in the specific game state is digested, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. be. The production mode of the transition state is the remaining pending consumption mode. In addition, the remaining hold digestion mode is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity due to the normal game during the specific game state, and a mode after the opening of the general electricity after the opening of the general electricity is finished. You can divide. In the pre-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the right to target the general electricity, and in the post-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the left because the general electricity is closed.

If the remaining hold digestion mode, which is the production mode of the transition state, is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity and a mode after the end of the opening of the general electricity, the player can determine whether the general electricity is open (should he hit the right side) or is closed. It becomes easy to understand whether it is (should hit left). If not divided, it becomes easier to recognize that the remaining hold is being consumed through the transition state.

Also, as described above, the transition state and the specific game state (shortening of working hours) may be combined into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same production mode may be used without dividing the production mode.
In this case, the advantageous state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation display game can be used as a common effect mode. As will be described later, when a special figure hit occurs due to the digestion of the remaining hold (a big hit by passing V in a small hit), the player is more likely to win than when a special figure hit occurs during the specific game state. If the game value to be given is increased, a large game value can be obtained in spite of the fact that it is unclear from a common presentation mode whether the game is in a time-saving state or in the process of consuming the remaining hold, thereby making the player happy. . It should be noted that here, the game value (privilege) is, for example, the number of time reductions after the end of the big win, the number of finally obtained big wins, and the like.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described. First, in the normal game state, when a big hit (not due to V winning) occurs in a special figure variation display game, the game transitions to a specific game state after the big win state ends.

In the specific game state, when a small win (a big win state is achieved by passing V) by a special figure variation display game, the game returns to the specific game state again after the big win state ends. In this case, it returns to time saving mode #1, and the number of times of saving time as game value (privilege) is below the reference number of times (number of times of saving time ≤ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, transition from the specific game state to the transition state. For example, this predetermined transition condition is (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of time reductions (first predetermined number, initial value of time reduction variation number 2), and ( ii) The second predetermined number of times (time reduction Either the initial value of the number of fluctuations 1 (for example, twice the number of times of time saving) is exceeded, or (iii) a predetermined number of times of opening (for example, two times) is completed. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the time saving number of times (first predetermined number of times).

In the specific game state, the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 is that the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, can be executed a number of times in a short time. If only the condition for transition from the specific game state is that the number of times exceeds the time-saving number of times, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, deviates from the original specifications of the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加However, by providing two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the sub-variation display game can be treated as a bonus (privilege), and the player can play the game according to the original specifications without causing any loss. If the player plays the game normally, it is unlikely that the condition (i) is established and the transition state is entered while the condition (ii) is established. The reason for setting the condition (iii) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the time-saving mode # 2 of the specific game state, it can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display game of 99 times of time-saving is executed, so a small hit (becomes a big hit state by passing V) is almost certainly generated. Then, after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time saving mode #1) is entered again. Therefore, the time saving mode # 2 is the next continuation confirmation mode (
confirmation mode).

In the transition state, when the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state as the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, in the transition state, when a small hit (becomes a big hit state by passing V in the small hit) occurs, the time saving mode # of the specific game state after the end of the big hit state
2 and 99 times of time saving are given. That is, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the remaining hold is digested, the number of time reductions (≤ Compared to 5), the number of times of time saving increases, and the game value given to the player increases. Furthermore, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), a small hit (big hit after passing V) will almost certainly occur in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of 2 times A jackpot is secured as a game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game state transition of FIG. 54B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 54B, the remaining hold which is all the special figure 2 holds digested after the end of the time saving is divided into the predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold) and excessive hold (second remaining hold), and the production corresponding to the transition state The residual hold digestion mode as a mode is divided into a time-saving residual hold digest mode in which a predetermined residual hold is digested and an excess hold digest mode in which excess hold is digested. Here, the predetermined remaining hold is the first predetermined number of the special figure 2 hold that occurs during the time saving and is digested after the time saving ends (all or part of the special figure 2 hold), and the excess hold Is a special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) that is digested after a predetermined remaining hold. Excessive pending consumption mode may include, for example, a mode of displaying a result screen showing a game result on the display device 41 and other special modes. In addition, since the time saving mode and the time saving mode (time saving mode # 1 or time saving mode # 2) are common in terms of digesting the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the time saving, the production mode as the same production mode It can be made common.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 55 is a table showing the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining pending number (prescribed remaining pending number) corresponding to the symbol which is the type of hit in the special figure variation display game. The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit, and here, it is determined by a big hit pattern random number, and time-saving patterns are excluded. The pattern is
It is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either a stop symbol number or a stop symbol pattern. (A
) relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game. (B) The upper figure relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal figure high probability state (during the time saving state), and the lower figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display in the general figure low probability state It relates to the winning pattern of the game (the winning pattern in the remaining reservation).

The symbol A is a stop symbol determined by a big hit symbol random number, and is a big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game. The pattern BF is also a stop pattern determined by the big hit pattern random number, but in the normal pattern high probability state (during the time saving state), the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit V passing (V winning) is a stop pattern. The symbol G is also a stop symbol determined by the random number of the big hit symbol, but it is related to the V passage (V prize) in the small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the low probability state of the normal pattern (small hit in the remaining hold) It is a jackpot stop symbol. If there is a small winning symbol random number in addition to the big winning symbol random number, the symbols BF and G may be the small winning stop symbols determined by the small winning symbol random number.

The pattern A has a distribution (selection rate) of 100%, and only the pattern A exists as a jackpot stop pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbols BF are distributed to the jackpot symbol random numbers at 40%, 25%, 15%, 10% and 10%, respectively. Pattern G is 100% sorted
is.

In the pattern A, which is the type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of times of time saving after the jackpot is one. Further, in the symbol A, the prescribed (scheduled) number of remaining reservations to be digested after the end of the time saving state is four. Therefore, the total number of reserved special figures 2 that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 5 (=1+4) by regulation. In symbol A, the continuation rate is {1-(1-1/8) ⁵ }×100%=48.7% for a small hit probability of 1/8, and the confirmed mode transition rate is (1 −1/8)×{1−(1−1/8) ⁴ }×100%=36.2%.

In the pattern BF, which is the type of jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game started during the normal high probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, and 1 time. be. In addition, the pattern B-
For F, the prescribed remaining pending numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 reserved that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 10 by regulation in any of the symbols BF. In the patterns BF, the continuation rate is the same for each of the small hit probability of 1/8, {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ } × 100% = 73.7%. The mode transition rates are respectively 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%,
61.2%.

In the pattern G, which is the type of jackpot (remaining pending jackpot) of the special figure 2 variable display game started during the normal low probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 99 times. In addition, in the pattern G, the prescribed number of remaining reservations is four. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 pending that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state is 103. In the pattern G, for a small hit probability of 1/8,
Each has a continuation rate of approximately 100% and a fixed mode transition rate of approximately 0%. Therefore, in the symbol G, after the jackpot ends in the remaining hold, the game shifts to the time saving mode #2, and the big win is surely made again, and then the specific game state (time saving state) continues. On the other hand, in the pattern G, the fixed mode transition rate is almost 0
%, and most of the flow transitions from the time saving mode # 2 in the specific game state to the time saving mode # 1 after a big hit.

In addition, the continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (within 5 times for pattern A, within 10 times for pattern BF, and within 103 times for pattern G) after the end of the jackpot state. There is a probability of re-entering the specific game state without going through the normal game state (normal mode). The confirmation mode transition rate is a probability of shifting from the remaining reservation digestion mode to the time saving mode #2 (confirmation mode, next continuation confirmation mode) by the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of special figures 2 suspended after the end of the big hit state (that is, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state), and the total number is 10. The continuation rate in the case of is greater than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A with the total number of five. Further, in the order of symbols BF, as the number of times of time saving decreases and the number of specified remaining reservations increases, the fixed mode transition rate increases.

As described above, in the symbols BF, the number of time reductions is set according to the symbol that is the type of the big hit (type of special result), so the specific game state after the end of the big hit is set by lottery (distribution) It has a variable time-saving number of times (1 to 5) that changes randomly to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the number of remaining pending (5 to 9), which is the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the specific game state, is changed according to the number of times of time saving. Therefore, the number of remaining pending positions is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. In particular, when a difference in game value is provided between the jackpot in the specific game state and the jackpot in the remaining hold, the player is happy and sad with the remaining hold number set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. .

In addition, regarding the winning pattern BF of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, even if the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations are variable, the total of the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations is constant. Since it is set to (10), it is possible to make the fixed mode transition rate variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. As described above, while the special figure 2 variable display game of the total number of time saving times and remaining pending numbers is executed, that is, the same effect in the specific game state (time saving mode) and transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) When the mode is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the time is being shortened or the remaining hold is being consumed. improves.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern fluctuation display game and the general electric movement.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), there is only one type of winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and it always becomes the same general pattern open pattern, and the winning state of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. , the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability per normal pattern is 0/251 (0%) in a low probability state, and 251/251 (1
00%). The normal pattern variation display game always wins in a high probability state and always misses in a low probability state, so randomness is eliminated. In addition, not limited to this, the probability per normal pattern is a value greater than 0% in a low probability state (normal game state, etc.) (for example, 2/251 (0.8%))
It's okay.

The start memory number (ordinary pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is substantially 0, and the normal pattern start gate 34 is played during the winning state (normal electric operation) and during fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Even if the ball passes, the normal pattern start memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not memorized. The normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started only during the stop display of the stop pattern, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 during the stop display, the normal pattern start memory is generated, but it is immediately digested and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. starts. In this way, since the starting memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not substantially accumulated, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the regular figure variation display game or the regular electric action and the special figure variation display game are easily interlocked without any deviation, and it also leads to the prevention of capture.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. In addition, it may be 200 msec in the normal pattern high probability state, and may be longer than 200 msec in the normal pattern low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In the specific game state (time saving state, normal high probability state), in order to link the normal pattern fluctuation display game (and general electric operation) and the special pattern fluctuation display game without any gap, the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern stop It is preferable that the time be as short as possible. Assuming that the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, since the game ball can pass through the normal pattern start gate 34 every 600 msec, the time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game, that is, the normal The sum of the figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop time is preferably less than 600 msec.

Also, the maximum count number (upper limit of count number) for general electricity is 10.

FIG. 56(B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the general pattern starting gate 34, the general variable prize winning device 37 (normal electrical), and their surroundings. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration for almost all game balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric (universal electric open) pass through the general electric start gate 34 and win the general electric.

First, in order to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 (percentage of one game ball winning) constant when hitting to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric power, the normal Obstacle nails 32a and structures are removed as much as possible from the game area 32 around the figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加For example, in the game area 32, the obstacle nail 32a and the structure are not arranged between the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 or on the left and right. Obstacle nails 32a arranged almost right above the normal figure starting gate 34 form a path for the game balls in two rows, and prevent the game balls from leaking out from there. The passage formed by the two rows of obstructing nails 32a smoothly connects to the upper passage 32c formed by the structure.

In addition, the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in a positional relationship such that the game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is. That is, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is arranged directly under the normal pattern starting gate 34 . For example, by the time the game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 reaches the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the normal fluctuation winning device 37
is opened, the distance L (the distance between the centers in the vertical direction) between the normal pattern start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 is the average falling speed of the game ball and one normal pattern It may be larger than the product of the time required for the variable display game. However, the distance L is set to a short distance so that even if the falling direction of the game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 deviates from the vertical direction, it will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as it is.

Furthermore, as described above, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is preferably of a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b falls forward so that the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is unlikely to be uneven. .

FIG. 56(C) shows an opening pattern (universal electric opening pattern) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (universal electric) of the present embodiment. A general electric open pattern shows the operation|movement aspect of the general electric by one general pattern hit. After the end of the jackpot state, the general electric release pattern is the same regardless of the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the jackpot type). In addition, the numbers enclosed in the square frame are the middle control pointers (Fig. 41
etc.).

In this embodiment, the general electric is opened twice in the general electric open pattern by one general pattern. In addition, the general electricity may be opened two or more times. The power supply opening is divided into the first half opening and the second half opening across a long interval in which the power supply is closed. A general electric interval time (wait time), which is an interval time, is 60000 msec, and the general electric open time of the first half opening and the second half opening is both 3000 msec.

For example, if the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, the game ball reaches the normal electric every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the normal electric 5 times during the first half opening of 3000 msec, and 60000 msec. After the interval of 5 during the second half opening of 3000msec
It is possible to win a prize in the commuter train. The special 2 hold accumulated during the first half opening can be digested during the interval of 60000 msec, which is the closed state of the electricity, and the number of special 2 holds can be set to 0, and the maximum during the later half opening Limited (here 4) special figure 2 reservations are accumulated.

During the interval of the general electricity (during the closed state), when the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time reduction number, the specific game state (time reduction state, normal state high probability state, support state) It ends and becomes a normal pattern low probability state (transition state). Then, the special figure 2 hold that was saved during the first half opening but is digested after the time saving state ends will be the remaining reservation, and in addition, the special figure 2 reservation that will be accumulated by winning the general electricity during the second half opening of 3000 msec will also be the remaining reservation. becomes. In this way, even if it becomes a normal low probability state, it is possible to accumulate a lot of remaining reservations by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving the normal pattern per hit (specific result) of the normal pattern variation display game, it is possible to convert the normal variation prize winning device 37 to the open state multiple times, and the normal pattern variation display game In both the high-probability state in which the probability of winning a normal pattern is high and the low-probability state in which the probability is low, the normal variable winning device 37 can be converted to the open state. Therefore, even if the probability of winning a normal pattern is low, the normal variation winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special pattern 2 reservation can be accumulated, so that the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved. do.

Furthermore, in the first half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation and digest it at the interval, and in the latter half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation again and digest it after the general electricity operation ends.
For this reason, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and to make the number of remaining reservations variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 57-Figure 59, after the big hit, game state, normal pattern probability (per normal pattern probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 pending number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is a timing chart showing It should be noted that time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. FIG. 57 relates to after the jackpot of symbol A, FIG. 58 relates to after the jackpot of symbol B, and FIG.
This is related to after the big hit of the symbol F.

Regarding the state after the big hit of the pattern BF, the timing of changing from the normal pattern high probability state (specific game state) to the normal pattern low probability state is different due to the difference between the number of times of saving time and the number of specified remaining reservations. , pattern B and pattern F are illustrated. 2 of the game state and normal figure probability
The appearances other than one are common to all of the symbols BF.

In addition, Figure 57-Figure 59 shows the passage of the game ball of the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric) (starting Mouth 2
detection of the switch 37a) are also indicated by pulses. In FIGS. 57-59, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, and the pattern and change of the general pattern winning (winning the general pattern) are the same, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate. .

In FIGS. 57-59, during a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending in which the ending effect is executed, when the player hits to the right as prompted by a right-handed instruction display, the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (the first in FIG. 57). ), the general pattern (normal pattern) fluctuates on the general pattern display device 53, and the general pattern fluctuation display game is executed, and then stopped. Here, since it is in a low probability state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, it will stop off.

Here, the jackpot ending ends when the normal pattern comes off and stops, and it becomes a high probability state of the normal pattern probability, corresponding to the specific game state (time saving mode # 1) in FIG. 54A, the right hitting state with support become. At the beginning of the right-handed state with a support (normal pattern high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, and the normal pattern fluctuation starts. And since it is a high probability state with a normal pattern probability of 100%, it becomes a normal pattern hit and the general electric operation starts, and the general electric is opened as the first half open. In the open state in which the normal electric is opened, the game ball that has passed through the normal electric start gate 34 wins the normal electric as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special figure 2 reservation occurs, the special figure 2 reservation is digested, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100, the variation time (execution time) of the special figure 2 variation display game
And the stop display time is controlled based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) from the end of the jackpot state (variation start information setting processing in FIG. 23 and special figure fluctuation in FIG. 24 medium processing). In addition, the game control device 100 varies the variation time and the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in three types after the big hit of the symbol A, after the big hit of the symbol BF, and after the big hit of the symbol G. set as

After the big hit of symbol A in FIG. 57, the variation time is set sufficiently long so that the first special figure 2 variation display game continues at least until the end of the general electric operation, that is, the end of the second half opening. The variable time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is the normal electric operation time (660
00 msec, 66 seconds), but a margin (several seconds to ten and several seconds) may be added to the normal electric operation time. In this way, corresponding to the normal electric operation including the two open states (together)
, The first special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, and four special figure 2 reserves, which are the upper limit value, are accumulated during the execution of this special figure 2 variation display game.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol A is 1, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold that has accumulated 4 as the remaining hold is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2nd to 5th Special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

After the big hit of symbol B in FIG. 58, the first special figure 2 variation display game is started at least before the end of the first half opening of the general electricity and continues until after the end. In addition, the variation time of the first special figure 2 variation display game is substantially the same as the general electricity open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 58, but the details of the variation time will be described with reference to FIG. . Corresponding to the opening of the first half of the general electricity (together), the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value 4 be saved. The special figure 2 hold that has been saved is all digested during the interval when the general electricity is closed, and during the interval, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2 ~ 5th special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol B is 5 times, when the 5th special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a normal low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the general electricity is opened as the latter half opening. As soon as one special 2 hold is generated as a remaining hold due to the winning of the open electric power, the special 2 hold is digested, the 6th special 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special 2 holds is becomes 0.

In response to the opening of the second half of the general electricity (together), the 6th special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value of 4 be saved. 6
The second special figure 2 variable display game is started at least before the end of the latter half of the general electricity and continues until after the end. The variable time of the sixth special figure 2 variable display game is the electric power open time (30
00 msec, 3 seconds), but the details are described in connection with FIG.

After the 6th special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the 4 special figure 2 reservations saved as the remaining reservation is executed 4 times with a considerably shorter variation time than the 1st and 6th times ( 7 to 1
0th special figure 2 variable display game). In this way, it is possible to realize five specified remaining pending numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games.

The 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed short variation time, and the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games (especially the variation time during the time saving state) A fixed variable time equal to or shorter than . As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo and the same rhythm, and the remaining hold can be consumed quickly. In addition, since the 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games have nothing to do with saving just by digesting the special figure 2 reservation, the variable fluctuation time is selected by sorting the fluctuation pattern (lottery). Then, the game is no longer monotonous. In addition, the variation time of the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display game (especially the variation time during the time saving state), and it responds slowly You can also perform a production to do.

Also, when the opening of the second half of the general electric power is completed, the state of hitting the general pattern ends, and the general pattern starting gate 34 (
A normal pattern fluctuation display game can be executed by passing a game ball in the normal pattern gate), but since the normal pattern hit probability is 0% and the normal pattern low probability state, the normal pattern fluctuation display game does not produce a hit result. In addition, the stop after the end of the normal pattern per state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal pattern ending time.

After the big hit of the pattern F in FIG. 59, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, the general pattern prize, the number of special patterns 2 pending, the special pattern variation display game (special pattern variation) The appearance and changes are the same as after the big hit of symbol B in FIG. However, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal pattern high probability state) to the transition state (normal pattern low probability state, remaining reservation digestion mode) is different due to the fact that the number of times of time reduction and the specified remaining number of reservations are different between the pattern B and the pattern F. .

After the big hit of the pattern F, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is completed, the specific game state (time saving mode) ends and the general pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) is entered. . After that, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed 9 times in the same way as after the big hit of the symbol B, and 9 prescribed remaining pending numbers can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time corresponding to the open state of the general electricity, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the closed state (interval) of the general electricity. A two-variation display game can be executed in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation by opening the first half of the general electricity and digest it at the interval, and save the special figure 2 reservation again by opening the second half of the general electricity and digest it after the end of the general electricity operation. For this reason, the number of remaining reservations can be made larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and the number of remaining reservations can be made variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

In addition, although not shown after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, while repeating the general electric operation, the special figure 2 variable display game is a short fixed such as the 2nd to 5th times and 7th to 10th times in FIGS. Only the number of times of shortening of working hours (99 times) and the remaining reserved minutes (4 times) may be executed in variable time. In addition, the pattern G
If the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game after the big hit is fixed, the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the variation time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous.

[Countermeasures against misalignment]
Here, as a countermeasure against the deviation between the start timing of the normal electric opening (normal electric operation) and the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the jackpot state, the appropriate time value regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation display game and the general electric operation think about.

FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 are time charts showing examples 1 and 2 of occurrence of a deviation between the start timing of the general electricity opening and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game. 60 and 61 are similar to those shown in FIG.
8, and shows the state after the big hit of symbol B (5 times of time saving, 5 specified remaining pending numbers).

In FIG. 60, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (normal pattern gate) in the jackpot ending (jackpot state) before the specific game state and the normal pattern fluctuation display game (loss fluctuation) starts, the normal pattern fluctuation The display game may have a longer variable time than the time saving state. In this case, even if the next game ball passes through the normal pattern gate in the specific game state, the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, and furthermore, when the next game ball passes through the normal pattern gate, the normal pattern is finally changed. When the display game (hit fluctuation) starts, the start timing of opening the electric power is delayed (deviation <1>) from the case where it is started immediately after the big win ending (FIG. 58).

In addition, in FIG. 60, when the big hit is repeated, the special figure 2 suspension before the big hit state is carried over after the big hit state, and when the big hit state ends, the special figure 2 changes immediately without waiting for the electric power to be opened. A display game is started. Then, the start timing of the special figure 2 variation display game shifts before (deviation <2>) than when the special figure 2 variation display game is started after the general electricity is opened (FIG. 58).

If deviation <1> and deviation <2> occur at the same time, 1
The start timing of the second special figure 2 variable display game is greatly shifted forward (forward shift). Then, as shown in Figure 60, the 6th long-running special figure 2 variation display game also deviates greatly from the second half of the open electricity, and the 7th and 8th special figure 2 variation display games are played during the second half opening. It will start, and during the second half opening, excessive winning will occur in general electricity than in FIG. 58, and one extra special figure 2 hold will occur. Therefore, the actual number of remaining reservations becomes 6, which is one more than the prescribed number of remaining reservations of 5.

In FIG. 61, the special figure 1 suspension that occurred during or before the big hit state is carried over after the big hit state, and if there is no special figure 2 suspension at the end of the big hit state (special figure 2 reservation number = 0), the big hit state The special figure 1 variation display game is started immediately at the end of , and the start timing of the special figure 2 variation display game is shifted later than when it is started immediately after the general electricity is opened (FIG. 58).

That is, the start timing of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game lags behind the start timing of the general electricity opening (later lag). Then, as shown in FIG. 61, 5
Along with the execution of the second special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the 6th long special figure 2 fluctuation display game is greatly delayed from the start of the second half of the public electricity, and the special figure 2 hold that accumulates during the second half is open. 3
Only 1 piece is saved and 1 piece is missing from 4 pieces. Therefore, the actual number of remaining reservations becomes 4, which is one less than the prescribed number of remaining reservations of 5.

In particular, unlike the special figure 2 pending priority digestion (special figure 2 priority fluctuation) of the present embodiment, in the case of special figure 1 pending priority digestion, the start timing of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is greatly shifted later. occur.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining deviation countermeasures for preventing the excess or deficiency of special figure 2 reservations due to the above-mentioned forward deviation and backward deviation, and eliminating the difference between the actual remaining pending number and the prescribed remaining pending number. FIG. 62 and FIG. 58
Corresponding to , the state after the big hit of the pattern B (5 times of time saving, 5 specified remaining pending numbers) is shown.

As a countermeasure against deviation, the fluctuation time Ta of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a value obtained by adding a margin (several seconds to tens of seconds) to the electric power open time in the first half. Also, the electric interval time Tb is
A value obtained by adding a margin (several seconds to tens of seconds) to the time required for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to fluctuate four times with a short fixed fluctuation time. For example, the time required for four fluctuations is (fixed fluctuation time+fixed stop display time)×4. Furthermore, the variable time Tc of the sixth special figure 2 variable display game is set to a value larger than the electric power open time in the second half.

FIGS. 63 and 64 are time charts showing the effect (effect 1) and the effect (effect 2) of the deviation countermeasures on the forward deviation and the backward deviation, respectively.

In FIG. 63, even if the opening of the first half of the general electricity is delayed from the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game due to the delay in the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game Ta
However, since it is longer by a margin (several seconds to tens of seconds) than the opening time of the first half opening of the general electricity (3000 msec, 3 seconds), the delay in the opening of the first half of the general electricity can be absorbed. That is, special figure 2 before the jackpot state
While the first special figure 2 variable display game starts immediately after the end of the big hit state and continues for a long time due to the carryover of the hold, the first half of the general electric power is opened.

In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed four times or more in a short fixed variation time during the general electrical interval time Tb, which is the period in which the general electrical is closed. For this reason, the special 2 reserve will always be 0 by the time the second half of the public electric is opened, and the winning of the first public electric in the second half will be the start of the special 2 fluctuation display game. The effect of the delay in opening the first half of the is erased.

Furthermore, in order to set the variation time Tc of the sixth special figure 2 variable display game to a value larger than the electric power opening time in the second half, the special figure 2 hold accumulates up to four upper limits, and the actual remaining during the second half opening It is possible to suppress the difference between the pending number and the specified remaining pending number.

In FIG. 64, even if the first special figure 2 variable display game is delayed with respect to the opening of the first half of the general electricity due to the lag, it can be absorbed during the long general electricity interval time Tb. For this reason, the special 2 reserve will always be 0 before the opening of the second half of the general electricity starts, and the winning of the first general electricity in the second half will be special 2
Since the fluctuation display game is started, the influence of the delay of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is eliminated.

In addition, as a countermeasure against other lags, since the lag behind the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is caused by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed in the specific game state, the time value of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ( Fluctuation time and stop display time) may be an ultra-short-time fluctuation that allows the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to always start during the first half of the public electricity. As an ultra-short time variation, unlike FIG. 64, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be shorter than the short fixed variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific game state.

Also, in the first place, in the present embodiment, since it is a special figure 2 pending priority digestion (special figure 2 priority variation) that executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with priority over the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, in the specific game state Since the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is at most about one time, the special figure 2 pending priority digestion itself is a countermeasure against lag.

[Countermeasures against stopping]
FIG. 65 is a time chart for explaining a method of increasing the actual number of remaining holds over the prescribed number of remaining holds by stopping. FIG. 65 corresponds to FIG. 58 and shows the state after the big hit of symbol B (5 times of time saving, 5 prescribed remaining reserved numbers).

In FIG. 64, during the opening of the first half of the general electric, only 4 general electric will be won by stopping shot, and up to 5 will not be awarded. That is, only 4 special figures 2 hold are generated during the opening of the first half of the general electricity,
Do not generate up to the maximum (5 corresponding to the prescribed number of times of time saving). For this reason, the 5th rotation of the prescribed number of times of shortening the working hours does not start, and unlike FIG. 58 and FIG.

Due to the second general electric operation (per second general pattern), the fifth special figure 2 during the opening of the first half of the general electric
The variable display game begins, and finally it becomes a normal low probability state, but since the general electric is already operating, the general electric operation can be continued until the second half is opened and a special 2 hold can be generated. In this way, the normal high-probability state is extended by the stopping strike, and the normal electric power operates twice, so the number of remaining pending numbers is several (
4 here) can be increased.

FIG. 66 is a time chart for explaining countermeasures against stopping shots. Game control device 100
, In the specific game state, when the second half opening in one normal electric operation ends (when the normal electric operation ends), that is, when the normal electric open state of the specified number of times (2 times) ends, End the specific game state. For example, normal electric residual ball processing (Fig. 42) or normal drawing per end processing (Fig. 43
), the game control device 100 can terminate the specific game state when the second half opening is completed by providing a processing step for setting the number of time reduction fluctuations to 0.

This corresponds to (iii) of the transition condition that transitions from the specific game state to the transition state described above with reference to FIG. After the end, it transitions to the transition state (remaining hold mode). It should be noted that, if there is no special figure 2 hold when ending the specific game state by the end of the second half open, it jumps over the transition state (remaining hold mode) and transitions to the normal game state (normal mode) of FIG. 54A.

In this way, as shown in Figure 65, the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuations has not reached the number of times of working hours (5 times here), Since the figure hit probability has fallen to a low probability, there is no second normal figure hit and there is no second normal electric operation. For this reason, the advantage of stopping shots is lost, and the player does not stop shots.

In addition, as another stop shot, when the special figure 2 reservation before the big hit state is carried over after the big hit state, the remaining reservation may increase unless the game ball is launched until this special figure 2 reservation is completely digested. . As a countermeasure against this, after the game ball is detected by the gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34 after the end of the jackpot state, the special figure 2 variation display game can be started.

[Indication of how to hit]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a hitting instruction display for suggesting (instructing) the player how to shoot a game ball on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, the form of the hitting instruction display may change step by step. In particular, FIG. 67 shows how the right-handed instruction display changes in stages, but the left-handed instruction display may similarly change in stages.

In FIG. 67, during the jackpot (during the jackpot round) and during the general electricity opening, the large winning opening (special variable winning device) and the general electricity (ordinary variable winning device 37) are opened, so the player hits right. There is Therefore, during the jackpot (during the jackpot round) and during the general electricity opening, the production control device 3
00 displays the right-handed instruction display in a large manner so as to stand out. However, in the other big hit endings and during the intervals of the electric power (during the closed state), there is not much profit in hitting to the right even in the right hitting state, and it is not necessary to shoot the game ball by hitting to the right. For this reason, during the jackpot ending or the interval of the electric power, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display in an inconspicuous and small manner.

Immediately before opening the first half and opening the second half of the electric power, the performance control device 300 changes step by step the mode of the right-handed instruction display displayed in a small size so as not to stand out, and the opening of the first half and the opening of the second half are performed. be conspicuously displayed in a large format at or immediately after the start of the As a result, the player can start launching right-handed game balls before the first half is opened in preparation for the first half, and can start right-handed game balls before the second half is opened in preparation for the second half. You can start launching. Therefore, in the first half opening and the second half opening of the general electricity, it is possible to accumulate the specified number of special figure 2 reservations by repeatedly winning the general electricity, and the specified number of remaining reservations can be achieved.

FIG. 68 is a diagram exemplifying a gradual change in the hitting instruction display (here, right-hand hitting instruction display).

(A) is the same as the step-by-step change shown in FIG. 67, but the arrow-shaped right-handed instruction display changes stepwise (three steps) from an inconspicuous small aspect like a solid-line arrow. It will be a large size that stands out. Conversely, just before the big win ending or just before the interval of the general electricity, as indicated by the dotted line arrows, the conspicuous large form may be changed stepwise (three steps) into an inconspicuous small form.

In (B), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-handed instruction display changes from an inconspicuous white state to a multi-step (three-step) partial (gradual) red color, etc., and as a whole It becomes colored and conspicuous. Conversely, like the dotted arrows, just before the jackpot ending or just before the interval of the general electricity, it changes in stages (three stages) from a conspicuous state that is colored as a whole to a white state that is inconspicuous. You can become

In (C), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-handed instruction display changes from an inconspicuous white (outline) mode to a noticeable color in stages (three stages), from blue to yellow, and then to a conspicuous red color. becomes a form. The color may change from a light color (low saturation state) to a dark color (high saturation state), or from a dark color (low lightness state) to a bright color (high lightness state). and may change. Conversely, like the dotted arrows, just before the jackpot ending or just before the interval of the general electricity, it changes from a conspicuous red state to an inconspicuous white (outline) state in stages (three steps). good too.

[Example of screen transition]
69A to 69D are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the first embodiment. The effect on the display device 41 is controlled by the effect control device 300 . Note that FIG. 69 corresponds to FIG. 58 (after the big win at symbol B).

In (a), in the last big win round (10R) of the big wins, the big win round effect is executed. Since there is an advantage to hitting to the right, the arrow-shaped hitting to the right instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuously large manner.

Subsequently, in (b), the big win ending effect is executed in the big win ending after the last big win round. Even in the right-handed state, there is not much benefit in hitting right-handed, so the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous and small manner.

Next, in (C), in the time saving state after the big hit ending, it is the state before the start of the special figure variation display game. The production mode is time saving mode #1. In the special figure 1 reserved number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "0" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number number "0" is displayed. Since it is a right-handed state with a support (universal pattern high probability state), and the general electric power is released soon, the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuous large manner. In addition, as described above, the mode of the right-handed hitting instruction display 551 displayed in a small size may be changed step by step to a large mode.

The game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 and the normal pattern fluctuation starts, but since it is a high probability state with a normal pattern probability of 100%, it becomes a normal pattern hit and the normal electric operation starts, opening the first half (first half power supply open)
As a result, the general electricity will be opened.

Then, in (d), the game ball that passed through the general electric start gate 34 in the open state of the general electric wins the general electric as it is, and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started. At the start of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, an effect corresponding to the time saving mode #1 is set by the variable effect setting process (FIG. 52).

As identification information, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is displayed in the variation display area 61.
0 indicates that it is being executed, and variation (↓↓↓) of decorative reduced patterns (small patterns) as identification information is being executed in the variable display area 615 . In the left region 610A, right region 610B, and middle region 610C of the variable display region 610, the left pattern (decoration first pattern A), the right pattern (decoration first pattern B), and the middle pattern (decoration first pattern C) are respectively displayed. fluctuating. Each decorative special pattern (left pattern, right pattern, middle pattern) consists of a square frame (frame image) and a number (number image), but a character (character image) may be used instead of the square frame. Within the frame, the color of the numbers is different from the color of the part other than the numbers. Also, in (d), each decorative special pattern is fluctuating at a high moving speed (high-speed fluctuating), but the frame image (or character image) is hidden (deleted) and only the numbers fluctuate. you can Also, each decorative special pattern may be displayed semi-transparently and thinly during high-speed fluctuation.

In the second holding display portion 530b (standby area) that displays the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the second holding display, the holding display 533 is displayed by winning the electric power.
(Second reserved display) is momentarily displayed, but immediately
to (hold shift). In the pending execution area 540, a variable pending display 533b indicating variable pending related to the special figure variable display game being executed (starting memory that has become the execution right of this special figure variable display game) is displayed. In addition, the 1st reservation display part 530a which displays the 1st starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) as the 1st reservation display (the 1st starting memory display) is not displayed here.

After that, in (E), during the opening of the first half of the general electricity, the special figure 2 suspension occurs one after another due to the winning of the general electricity, and the second suspension display unit 530b shows the suspension display 533 corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension one after another. to be displayed. Then, in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660,
The number "0" indicating the number of special figures 1 reserved and the number "3" indicating the number of special figures 2 reserved are displayed. In addition, an enemy character 554 (a tadpole) that will fight in a later battle presentation (battle presentation) appears, and an ally character 557 also appears. As a speech effect, the enemy character 554's speech "It's a game" is displayed in characters, and the friendly character 557's speech "hold increase" is displayed in characters corresponding to the increase in the special figure 2 reservation. The lines may be output from the speaker as voice.

Then, in (F), in response to the accumulation of four special figures 2 reserves, which is the upper limit value, the line "Filling completed" of the ally character 557 is displayed. Special figure 2 pending number display unit 660
, the number "4" indicating the number of special figures 2 pending is displayed.

Next, in (G), the first half opening (the first half of the general electric opening) ends, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state ends, and the stop pattern "1, 8, 2" is displayed in the variable display areas 610 and 615 . Since it is during the electric interval (during the closed state), there is not much benefit in hitting to the right even in the state of hitting to the right, and the hitting to the right instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous and small manner.

In addition, here, as a look-ahead effect (suspension change notice), the suspension display 533 in the normal mode changes to a mode (character) indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable display game of special figure 2 suspension, and the suspension display 533d- 533 g. For example, the degree of expectation of a character is
33e>suspension display 533d>suspension display 533g>suspension display 533f.

After that, in (h), the special figure 2 suspension of the suspension display 533d is digested, and the second special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state has a considerably shorter variation time than the first special figure 2 variation display game. is executed during the utility interval. In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, the number "3" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed. Furthermore, the second pending display portion 530b has moved to the upper right side, but the pending display 533d has disappeared.

In the pending digestion region 540, a variable pending display 533b corresponding to the pending display 533d is displayed. The change pending display 533b (▽) is different from the holding display 533 imitating a character, but may be the same. If it is a different aspect, it is easy to display the pending display 533b during fluctuation in the narrow pending digestion area 540, and if it is the same aspect, the pending display 533 during standby (before digestion)
It is easy to understand the relationship between the change pending display 533b during digestion.

At the center of the screen, the character in the pending display 533d becomes a friendly character 557,
Attacking the enemy character 554 as a battle effect (acting on the enemy character 554),
A beam (light ray) is emitted to the enemy character 554 . The enemy character 554 that appears during the interval of the general electric is the one that appeared in (O) and (F) during the opening of the first half of the general electric, and the continuity of the presentation is maintained. Instead of becoming the character 557, the holding display 533d that imitates the character may act directly on the enemy character 554 to fight. In this case, in (h), the pending digestion area 540 and the variable pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (h) described later).

After that, in (ke), the third special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state is executed during the interval of the general electric power with a short variation time after the second special figure 2 variation display game is completed. In the pending digestion area 540, a variable pending display 533b corresponding to the pending display 533e is displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, the number "2" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed. Also, the pending display 533e has disappeared from the second pending display portion 530b.

On the screen, the character with the pending display 533e becomes a sub-character 558a (helper character, auxiliary character) that supports the character 557 of the friend, and the character 5 of the enemy.
Participate in the attack of 54 and shoot a beam (
ray, effect) is emitted to the enemy character 554 . It should be noted that when participating in the attack, the sub-character 558a's beam mode is changed so that it can be recognized that it has participated in the attack.
It differs from the mode of the beam of the friendly character 557 . In addition, sub-character 558a
Instead of becoming a character-like pending display 533e, the enemy character 55 is displayed directly.
4 (the same holds true for the pending indications 533f and 533g below).
In this case, from (vi) to (sa), the pending digestion area 540 and the variable pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (z) to (g) described later).

Also, the character of the pending display 533 in the second pending display portion 530b and the sub-character 5
58 is, for example, displayed smaller or displayed in monochrome or light color so as to be less conspicuous than character 557, which is the main character. This makes it easier to recognize which character is the main character.

Subsequently, in (J), the fourth special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state is executed during the interval of the general electric power with a short variation time after the third special figure 2 variation display game is completed. . In the pending digestion area 540, a variable pending display 533b corresponding to the pending display 533f is displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, the number "1" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed. Also, the pending display 533f has disappeared from the second pending display portion 530b.

On the screen, the character in the pending display 533f becomes a sub-character 558b that cheers on the friend character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and joins the friend character 557 (main character) and the sub-character 558a to beam ( ray) to the enemy character 554 .

Subsequently, in (S), the 5th special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state is executed during the interval of the electric power with a short variation time after the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is completed. . In pending digestion area 540, variable pending display 533b corresponding to pending display 533g is displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, the number "0" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed. Also, the pending display 533g has disappeared from the second pending display portion 530b.

On the screen, the character with the pending display 533g becomes a sub-character 558c that supports the friendly character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and joins the friendly character 557 (main character) and sub-characters 558a and 558b. A beam (light ray) is emitted to the enemy character 554 .

Next, in (b), the fifth special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit state is completed, and the losing stop symbols "7, 2, 3" are displayed in the variation display areas 610, 615. Moreover, thereby, a time saving state (time saving mode #1) is complete|finished, and it will be in the transition state (ordinary figure low probability state) which can digest remaining pending|holding. After that, the second half opening (the latter half of the power supply opening) starts and the power supply is opened.

Subsequently, in (S), the game ball that passed through the general electric start gate 34 in the open state of the general electric wins the general electric as it is, and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started. Here, it is a right-handed state without support (universal low probability state), but since the general electric is opened as the second half opening, the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuous large manner. In addition, as described above, the form of the right-handed hitting instruction display 551 displayed in a small size may be changed step by step to a large form.

Here, since the time saving state with a high probability of general pattern ends, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to recognize that the general electricity is open, so the game board 30 A general electric position image 561 that schematically shows the general electric position in .

In the following (S) to (Na), the remaining hold is digested in the transition state after the end of the time saving state, so that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game from the 6th to the 10th time after the end of the jackpot state is executed. is shown. In FIGS. 69C and 69D, the transition state (S) to (N)
Then, as described above, assuming that the advantageous state advantageous to the player continues from the time saving state, the same production mode (common production mode) as the time saving mode # 1 of the time saving state is set. Therefore, from (s) to (na), the same effect as from (d) to (b) is executed.

That is, from (S) to (So) during the second half of the general electricity, an effect of storing four special figures 2 pending (remaining pending) is executed in response to the sixth special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the second half opening ends. After (ta) to (
In (na), while the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display games are executed, the battle effect corresponding to each special figure 2 variation display game is performed.

In this way, if the time saving state and the transition state are set to the same production mode, it is difficult to recognize whether it is in the time saving state or the remaining hold is being consumed in a common production mode, but the remaining hold fluctuation display game A great game value can be obtained by winning, and the player can be pleased.

In addition, in a transition state, the example which switches from time saving mode #1 of time saving state to another remaining reservation digestion mode is later mentioned in FIG. 69E and FIG. 69F.

From (G) to (G), the second half of the power supply will be open (the second half of the power supply will be open).
The second special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure 2 reservation is increased as the remaining reservation. after that,
From (T) to (Na), 4 special figures 2 hold (remaining hold) accumulated in the second half open are 1 from the 7th
It is digested by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game up to the 0th time. It should be noted that, after (na), it will be in the normal game state, and the production mode will also change to the normal mode.

It should be noted that the enemy character 554 that appears after the start of the latter half of the public electricity is the one that appeared from (d) to (shi) in the time-saving state, and the continuity of the production with the time-saving mode # 1 is maintained. . In addition, from (S) to (Na) is the same production corresponding to (E) to (B), but (C)
The words of the enemy character 554 in , and the friendly character 557 (main character),
Characters of the pending display 533 may be different from those in the time saving mode #1. In addition, after (T), the state changes from the right-handed state to the left-handed state due to the end of the second half opening, and the left-handed hitting instruction display 552
is displayed in an inconspicuous and small manner. In addition, while the special figure 2 reservation is being digested from (T) to (G), the hitting instruction display (here, the left hitting instruction display 552) is displayed to prevent the player from being confused. Instead, after the special figure 1 variable display game has become possible to start after the special figure 2 suspension is completely digested (na), the hitting instruction display may be displayed.

In addition, (d) to (ne) indicate the case where the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation display game of (tsu) becomes a small hit (big hit after passing V) or a big hit, and (d) becomes SP reach and movie production is executed. In the movie, an effect may be performed in which the enemy character 554 (tadpole) explodes and disappears.

In addition, in (d), the left-hand shot instruction display 552 is changed from conspicuous color (red) to inconspicuous color (blue) so as not to interfere with the movie effect. Also, in (d), hold display 5
The aspect of 33g may be changed back to the original aspect (▽). Furthermore, in (d), the suspension display 533, the suspension digestion area 540, and the variable suspension display 533b may be hidden so as not to interfere with the movie presentation.

Subsequently, at (N), a small win or big win stop symbol is displayed, and at (N), a small win or big win fanfare effect is executed.

As described above, an example of the effect on the display device 41 after the big hit of the symbol B has been described with reference to FIGS. )
The same effects as in FIGS. 69A-D are executed, just before . For example, after the big hit of the pattern F, the time saving state ends at the point of (g).

In addition, after the big hit of pattern A, the effect of accumulating the special figure 2 reservation from (E) to (F) is executed until the end of the second half of the general electricity (completion of the general electricity operation), and from (K) to (So) The effects up to (T) may be omitted, and the effects after (T) may be executed after the end of the second half opening. Further, after the big hit of the pattern G, for example, the production from (d) to (sa) may be repeated until the time saving state is finished.

[Another example of screen transition]
FIGS. 69E and 69F are another examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the first embodiment. (S1) to (N1) in FIGS. 69E and 69F replace (S) to (N) in FIGS. 69C and 69D. This another example also corresponds to FIG. 58 (after the big hit of symbol B).

In the transition state (S 1) to (Na 1), unlike the above-mentioned (S) to (Na), after the time saving state ends, the production mode is different from the time saving mode # 1 in the time saving state. Figure 5
4A). As shown by hatching, in the remaining pending digestion mode, the screen background may be different from that in the time saving mode #1 in relation to the change in the production mode. Therefore, from (S1) to (N1)
Then, the production of a mode different from (d) to (si) is executed.

From (S1) to (So1), the second half of the general electricity is maintained (the second half of the general electricity is opened), and the 6th special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, and the special figure 2 is held as the remaining hold. To increase. In addition, the enemy character 554 is changed from the character (tadpole) of time saving mode #1 from (C) to (SA) to another character (UFO) in relation to the change of the production mode.
Others are the same as (S) to (S).

After that, from (Ta 1) to (Na 1), 4 special figures 2 reserve (remaining reserve) accumulated in the second half open
is consumed by executing the special figure 2 variable display game from the 7th to the 10th time. note that,(
1) After that, the normal game state is entered, and the production mode is changed to the normal mode.

From (T1) to (N1), the hold display 533d-53 in the second hold display portion 530b
3g is displayed in a manner imitating a bullet, unlike (T) to (N). Then, a friendly character 557 displayed from (S1) to (So1) rides on another friendly character, a tank character 563, and unites (acts and unites), and an enemy character 554 ( UF
An effect of shooting O) down with a bullet is executed. Incidentally, as the reservation change notice, the mode (color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the reservation display 533d-533g in the second reservation display section 530b may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the big hit.

Every time a new Toku-zu 2 variable display game is executed, the bullet-like reservation display 533 in the second reservation display unit 530b is erased, and the tank character 563 is replaced by the enemy character 554 (U).
FO) can be rendered as if it were used for bombardment. The deleted pending display 533 becomes the variable pending display 533b in the pending digestion area 540, but the variable pending display 533b (▽
) is different from the hold display 533 imitating a bullet.

In addition, (D1) to (N1) are (D) to (N)
is the same as , so the description is omitted. In addition, in the movie of (D1), the enemy character 5
54 (UFO) may be shot down and dropped.

In addition, after (Ta 1), the second half of the general electricity is completed and the state of hitting to the left is reached, so Fig. 54
As in A, the remaining pending digestion mode as a production mode is (S 1) to (So 1) pre-commercial power open mode and (Ta 1) to (Na 1) (or (Nu 1)) It is divided into modes after the end of the mains disconnection. For this reason, the background images from (S1) to (S1) (indicated by hatching) and (T1)
The background images (indicated by shading) from (na 1) (or (nu 1)) are different and have different effects. It should be noted that the enemy character 554 is displayed in the pre-completion mode and post-completion mode.
(UFO) may be made the same, and the production may be made to have commonality.

As shown in FIG. 69E-F above, the effect mode of the predetermined state in which the general electricity is converted to the open state after the end of the time saving state is made different from the effect mode other than the predetermined state. The production mode other than the predetermined state is the production mode of (Ta 1) to (Na 1) (or (Nu 1)) during the digestion of the remaining hold when the power supply is closed, and during the time saving state ( They are the performance mode from c) to (sa), the performance mode in the jackpot state, and the performance mode in the normal game state (normal mode) without the battle performance. In particular, even in the same right-handed state, the player can easily recognize the predetermined state in which the general electric is open after the end of the time saving state by providing a different effect from that during the time saving state. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, when the low probability of the general pattern is made larger than 0% (for example, about several percent), the general pattern is converted to the open state by the normal pattern during the normal game state (normal mode) However, this case may also be included in the predetermined state in which the general power is converted to the open state.

In the above, with reference to FIGS. 69E to 69F, another example of the effect on the display device 41 after the big hit of the symbol B has been described. However, in the production after the big hit of the pattern CF, the timing of the end of the time saving state is before (Sa), so it changes to the remaining pending digestion mode before (Sa), and the mode of the pending display , the appearance of the character, the screen background, and other effects change. Before (S), if changing the mode of the pending display or the mode of the character gives a sense of incongruity, it is sufficient to switch only the screen background to that of the remaining pending mode.

In addition, after the big hit of symbol A, the effect of accumulating the special figure 2 hold from (d) to (f) is executed until the end of the second half of the general electricity (completion of the general electricity operation), and from (ki) to (so 1 ) can be omitted, and the effects after (T1) can be executed after the end of the second half opening. Further, after the big hit of the pattern G, for example, the production from (d) to (sa) may be repeated until the time saving state is finished.

[Modification of First Embodiment]
A modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 77. FIG. In this variant,
In the pattern BF, the number of times of time reduction is constant at 4 times, but the support state, which is the state related to the mode of general electric support, differs depending on the pattern, and as a result, the prescribed number of remaining reservations (the number of prescribed remaining reservations) It changes according to the design.

[The number of time reductions and the prescribed number of remaining reservations corresponding to the pattern according to the modified example]
FIG. 70 is a table showing the support state, the number of times of time saving, and the prescribed number of remaining reservations, etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the types of hits in the special figure variation display game, with respect to the modification. The symbol A and the symbol G are the same as those in FIG. 55 except that they are in the support state A, so the description is omitted.

In the pattern BF, which is the type of jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game started during the normal high probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is constant at 4 times, but the jackpot in the pattern BF Subsequent support states are support states AE, respectively, and change according to the pattern.

In addition, in symbols BD, the specified remaining pending numbers are 4, 6, and 8, respectively, depending on the support state. is. Therefore,
The total number of special figure 2 reserves that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 8, 10, 12 for the symbols BD, and is random for the symbols E and F.

In the patterns BD, the continuation rates are 65.6% and 73.6%, respectively, with respect to the small hit probability of 1/8.
7% and 79.9%, and the definite mode transition rates are 24.3%, 32.3% and 38.3%, respectively.
5%. In the pattern E and the pattern F, the continuation rate and determination mode transition rate are random. The continuation rate is the sum of the special figures 2 pending that are digested after the end of the big hit state (that is, the special figure 2 after the end of the big hit state
The number of executions of the variable display game) increases as the total increases in the symbols BD. In addition, as the prescribed remaining pending number increases in the symbols BD, the determination mode transition rate increases.

In this way, depending on the type of jackpot (special result) (symbol B-F), the mode of operation of the electric power after the end of the jackpot state (support state, support mode) is different, so the type of jackpot (symbol B- Depending on F), both the rate of continuation and the rate of transition to the fixed mode are different, and the amusement of the game is improved.

[Characteristics of the normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement according to the modification]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal electric movement in relation to the modification. The normal pattern per probability, the maximum count number of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern stop time are the same as in FIG.

There are one or more (four in this case) winning patterns (hitting stop pattern, normal drawing winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and there are multiple patterns in the big hit pattern E and pattern F, but other big hit patterns. There is one type.

The start memory number (ordinary pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 1, and the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 34 during the winning state (during normal electric operation) and during fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. When passing, only 1 is stored as the starting memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Therefore, in this modification, the process of step A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 34) is not executed, and even if the normal pattern variation display game is fluctuating or the normal pattern hit state is in effect, the normal pattern pending number is +1 can be updated.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is set corresponding to the support state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is fixed at 48 msec. As described above, the total of the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern stop time is preferably less than 600 msec.

[Electric power open pattern according to the modification]
FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 show an opening pattern (general electric open pattern) of the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) of this modification. A general electric open pattern shows the operation|movement aspect of the general electric by one general pattern hit. The electric open pattern selected after the end of the jackpot state differs depending on the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the jackpot type). In addition, the number surrounded by the square frame is the value of the control pointer (FIG. 41, etc.) during the normal per figure.

After the jackpot state with the symbols A, B, and G is completed, the state related to the general electric support mode becomes the support state A (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal voltage open pattern in the support state A,
In the general electric operation by one general pattern hit, the general electric is opened twice with an interval in between. The general voltage interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and the general voltage open time of the first half opening and the second half opening is both 1300 msec.

Assuming that the shooting speed of game balls is 100 per minute, it takes 600 msec
Since the game ball can win every time, in the support state A, it is assumed that four game balls will win in the normal electric operation in one normal electric operation. It should be noted that, of course, when the game ball does not win well in the general electric, the actual number of winning prizes is less than the expected number (here, four). The total opening time 2600 msec of the electric power in the first half opening and the second half opening is slightly larger than the winning interval 600 msec multiplied by the assumed number (here, 4), so there is a margin.

After the jackpot state with the symbol C ends, the state related to the mode of general electric support becomes the support state B (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal/universal power supply open pattern of the support state B, the general/universal power supply is opened twice with an interval interposed in the normal/universal power operation per normal/universal pattern. The general electric interval time (wait time) is 30000 msec, and the electric open time of the first half opening and the second half opening are both 1950 msec.

Assuming that the shooting speed of game balls is 100 per minute, it takes 600 msec
Since the game ball can win every time, in the support state B, it is assumed that six game balls win in the normal electric operation in one normal electric operation. The total opening time of 3900 msec for the first half opening and the second half opening of the electric power is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the assumed number (here, 6), so that there is a margin.

After the jackpot state with the symbol D ends, the state related to the general electric support mode becomes the support state C (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal/universal power supply open pattern of the support state C, the general/universal power supply is opened twice with an interval interposed in one normal/universal power operation per normal pattern. The electric interval time (wait time) is 30000 msec, and the electric open time of the first half opening and the second half opening are both 2600 msec.

Assuming that the shooting speed of game balls is 100 per minute, it takes 600 msec
Since the game ball can win every time, in the support state C, it is assumed that 8 game balls will win in the normal electric operation in one normal electric operation. The total open time of 5200 msec for the first half open and the second half open is slightly longer than the product of the prize winning interval of 600 msec and the assumed number (here, 8), so there is a margin.

As described above, the period of the open state and the closed state (interval) of the general electric during the specific game state after the end of the big hit state or after the specific game state, according to the pattern that is the type of the big hit (special result) can be changed by Therefore, even if the number of times of time saving is the same four times, it is possible to change the stipulated remaining retention number and further the actual remaining retention number according to the pattern of the big win, thereby increasing the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game.

After the end of the jackpot state with the symbols E and F, the state related to the general electric support mode becomes the support states D and E (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 73(A), in the support states D and E, there are four winning patterns in the general pattern variation display game, 1 to 4 per general pattern. selected by lottery). The states in which 1 to 4 per normal pattern are selected in the support states D and E are respectively the support states D1 and E1, the support states D2 and E2, the support states D3,
E3, may be called support states D4, E4.

In the general electric operation by one general pattern, patterns 1 to 4 per general pattern (sapo state D1-D4,
In each of E1-E4), the normal/commercial power is opened 1 to 4 times with an interval in between. Regardless of the number of times of opening according to the pattern 1 to 4 per normal pattern (support state D1-D4, E1-E4), the normal power interval time (wait time) is 100msec, and the normal power open time is 1500 msec.

In addition, both the support state D1 and the support state E1, both the support state D2 and the support state E2, both the support state D3 and the support state E3, and both the support state D4 and the support state E4 have the same electric disconnection pattern. be.

Assuming that the shooting speed of game balls is 100 per minute, it takes 600 msec
A game ball can win a prize for each. Therefore, based on the total open time, the number of game balls that win the normal electric power in one normal electric operation is 2 in the support state D1, E1, 5 in the support state D2, E2,
It is assumed that there are 7 in the support states D3 and E3 and 10 in the support states D4 and E4. It should be noted that, of course, when the game balls do not win well in the general electricity, the actual number of winning prizes is less than the expected number.

As shown in FIGS. 73(B) and (C), the support state D and the support state E differ only in the distribution rate (selection rate) of the normal per pattern 1 to 4 in the distribution (lottery) by the per pattern random number. In the support state D corresponding to the pattern E, the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the patterns 1 to 4 per normal pattern is 40%, 30%, 20% and 10%, respectively. In the support state E corresponding to the pattern F, the distribution rate (selection rate) of the patterns 1 to 4 per normal pattern is 10%, 20%, 30% and 40%, respectively. Therefore, in the normal electric operation by one normal electric power hit, the average value of the number of times the electric power is opened is larger in the support state E (average value = 3 times) than in the support state D (average value = 2 times). .

In this way, when the big hit (special result) is of a predetermined type (symbols E, F), the operation mode of the general electric power after the end of the big hit state is changed to a plurality of operation modes (support state D1 -D4,E
1-E4) will be determined by distribution (lottery). Therefore, if the jackpot is a predetermined type (symbols E, F), there is no specified number of remaining reservations, and the player cannot predict how many actual numbers of reservations will be. Since the game can be played with a sense of anticipation, the interest in the game is improved.

[Timing chart according to modification]
Figure 74-Figure 76 shows the game state, normal pattern probability (per normal pattern probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 pending number, special figure fluctuation display game (special FIG. It should be noted that time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. FIG. 74 shows the case where the support state A comes after the big hit with the symbol B, FIG. 75 shows the case where the support state C comes after the big hit with the symbol D, and FIG. A case in which the support state D (or the support state E) is reached will be exemplified.

In addition, Figures 74 to 76 show the passage of the game ball through the normal starting gate 34 (normal gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the entry of the game ball into the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric) (starting Mouth 2
detection of the switch 37a) are also indicated by pulses.

In FIGS. 74-76, it is the same as in FIGS. 57-59 until the first general electric operation and the accompanying first special figure 2 variation display game are started.

In FIG. 74, after the big win at symbol B, the general electric operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in the support state A is executed three times, and the general electric is opened six times in total. As described above, the game control device 100 sets the variation time (execution time) and stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game to the number of special figure 2 variations from the end of the jackpot state (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game). ). And, in the support state A, it is controlled so that the fourth special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the number of times of time saving is executed in accordance with the third normal electric operation (normal per state). In addition, the stop after the end of the normal pattern per state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal pattern ending time.

The number of special 2 reserves increases while the power is open (open state), and special 2
It tends to decrease with digestion of reserves.

In addition, the variation time of the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation so that 4 special figure 2 reservations can be accumulated during the time saving state and the 3rd general electric operation It is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the display game and longer than one electric power opening time (first half opening time or second half opening time).

In FIG. 74, the fourth special figure 2 variation display game is started in accordance with the end of the second half opening in the second normal electric operation, but after the end of this second half opening and the start of the third normal electric operation If it is before, the fourth special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be ended at any time. In addition, in accordance with the end of the first half opening in the third general electric operation, the fourth special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stopped, but after the end of this first half opening and before the start of the second half opening, the fourth time You can end the special figure 2 fluctuation display game at any time.

Then, after the end of the third normal electric operation started by the normal figure hit in the time saving state, the fifth special figure 2 variation display game is controlled to start. The variation time of the 5th to 8th special figure 2 variation display games executed by the remaining hold after the end of the time saving state may be less than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games during the time saving state. As a result, the remaining hold can be consumed quickly. Conversely, the variation time of the 5th to 8th special figure 2 variation display games is made longer than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games in the time saving state, and the corresponding production is performed slowly. can also In addition, in the symbol B, the prescribed number of remaining reservations is four, which occurred during the time saving state.

In FIG. 75, after the jackpot with the symbol D, the general electric operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in the support state C is executed twice, and the general electric is opened four times in total. In support state C, 1
Four times of special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the number of times of time reduction in accordance with the second half opening of the second general electric operation (first second half opening) and the first half opening of the second general electric operation (second first half opening) is controlled to run.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the 4th special figure 2 variable display game is It is set longer than the variable time of the 2-variation display game and longer than the open time of the normal/commercial power (in FIG. 75, it is set to about twice the open time of the normal/commercial power). In addition, in FIG. 75, the fourth special figure 2 variation display game is stopped in accordance with the end of the first half opening in the second general electric operation, but the fifth special figure 2 variation after the second first half opening If a display game is to be executed, it may be slightly shifted.

The number of special 2 reserves increases while the power is open (open state), and special 2
It tends to decrease with digestion of reserves.

And, during the interval after the end of the second half opening, it is controlled so that the 5th to 7th special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started. After that, the second half opening in the second normal electric operation started by the normal figure hit in the time saving state is performed after the end of the time saving state, and the special figure 2 change display game is executed while increasing the special figure 2 hold as the remaining hold. . Appropriately adjusting the variation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the 5th time that is executed by the remaining hold after the time saving state ends, 5 to 12 by digesting 8 special figure 2 holds (remaining hold) after the time saving end The second special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed. In this way, in the symbol D, the specified number of remaining pending is eight.

In addition, since the remaining hold can be quickly digested, the variation time of the 5th to 12th special figure 2 variation display games may be less than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games in the time saving state. On the contrary, 5~
The variation time of the 12th special figure 2 variation display game may be made longer than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games in the time saving state, and the production may be performed slowly.

In addition, as in the case of the symbol D, also for the symbol C, the variation time (execution time) and the stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game are changed to the number of times of execution, corresponding to the operation mode of the general electric power (support state B). It can be changed accordingly so that the number of remaining reservations is six. For example, for symbol C, the number of remaining pending numbers is six by reducing the number of special figure 2 variable display games to be started during the interval of the general electric power after the end of time saving compared to the case of symbol D.

As described above, the pattern of the variable time (execution time) and the stop time according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is set according to the operation mode of the general electricity (support state AC). Therefore, it is possible to change the number of remaining reserves according to the mode of operation of the general electricity (support state AC).

In FIG. 76, after the jackpot with symbol E or symbol F, in support state D or support state E,
The general electric operation (first half open + interval + second half open + ...) according to the general pattern per pattern is randomly repeated, and the general electric is opened several times in total. In the support state D or the support state E, it is difficult to control so that four special-figure 2 variable display games corresponding to the number of times of time saving are executed in accordance with the random opening of the general electric power.

However, the number of special figures 2 pending increases during the opening of the general electricity (open state), and during the interval of the general electricity (
Closed state) tends to decrease due to digestion of special figure 2 pending.

In addition, the variation time of the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the variation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games so that 4 special figure 2 reservations can be accumulated during the time saving state. It is set to be longer than the one-time power supply open time. The number of remaining pending is the pattern 1 to 4 per general pattern (support state D1-D4, E1-E4
) is determined by the general electric operation mode corresponding to As shown in FIG. 76, when the normal pattern 4 hits the normal pattern at the end of the variation of the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the total open time of the general electric power is long, so the remaining number of reservations is also large. However, when the general pattern 1 per pattern becomes a general pattern, the total open time of the general electricity is small, so the number of remaining reservations is also small.

In addition, since the remaining hold can be quickly digested, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the fifth time after the end of the time saving state is less than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game for the 1st to 3rd times during the time saving state. good. Conversely, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game after the 5th time may be made longer than the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game of the 1st to 3rd times in the time saving state, and the production may be performed slowly. .

As a countermeasure against the above-mentioned deviation from the previous deviation in this modification, in order to match the specified remaining number of reservations and the actual remaining number of reservations, after the big hit of the pattern BD, during the fourth special figure 2 fluctuation display game It is mentioned that the fifth special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not executed until the electric power opening (first half opening) that started in 1 is completed. As a countermeasure against the above-mentioned later deviation, in order to match the specified remaining number of reservations with the actual remaining number of reservations, after the big hit of the pattern BD, the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation display game per normal figure The latter half of the general electricity is opened by the predetermined times (for example, 0 times in the design B, 2 times in the design D). Regarding the symbols E and F after the big hit, since the number of remaining reservations cannot be specified and is random, it is not necessary to take countermeasures against deviation. Conversely, since it is not necessary to take countermeasures against misalignment, patterns E and F
It is also possible to provide four patterns per normal pattern in the same way.

As described above, after the end of the big hit state in each pattern, except for the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit condition (1st to 3rd and 5th and later special figure 2 fluctuation display games) The variable time may be made the same regardless of the pattern BF to simplify the control and reduce the storage capacity used in the ROM 111b, RAM 111c, and the like.

[Example of screen transition according to modification]
77A and 77B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the modified example of the first embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 77 corresponds to FIG. 75 (after the big hit of symbol D).

After the same production as from (a) to (o) in FIG. In the state (during normal electricity closure), the number of special figures 2 pending decreases and the number of special figures 2 pending does not reach 4 easily.

After that, when the time saving state ends in (F), the number of special figures 2 pending reaches four, and then the same production as (K) and (H) in FIG. 69 is performed.

Next, in (H1) to (H4), unlike (H) to (S) in FIG. Instead of being a sub-character supporting the character 557 of the character 557, the main character fights one-on-one with the enemy character 554 one after another. After (H4), the same effects as those after (T) in FIG. 69 are performed.
A character such as 533i is used as a sub-character 558 that cheers on an ally character 557 .

In addition, after the time-saving state ends, the special figure 2 suspension decreases in the closed state of the normal electricity (during normal electricity closure) from (K) to (K2), and the normal electricity opening from (K3) to (K4) In the state (during normal electricity open), the special figure 2 hold increases. In the closed state of the electric power, there is not much profit in hitting right even in the state of hitting to the right, and the right hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous small manner. Therefore, the right-hand hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuously large manner.

As described above, the first embodiment and its modification were described, but the specific game state may be not only the time saving state but also the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state). In addition, 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1 + 2 types machine)
In addition, the first embodiment and its modification may be applied to a type of gaming machine (so-called digipachi) that has a specific game state (reduced time state or variable probability state). In one type of gaming machine with a variable state, especially for models with a high probability of hitting even with a low probability of special patterns after the end of the variable state (so-called sweet digital, a little patch), a big hit can be expected in the number of remaining reservations. The application of the embodiment and its modification is highly effective.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electrical) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, time saving state or probability variable state). Game control means (for example, game control device 100) can execute a game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) generated by winning a variable winning device. The game value given to the player when the game results in a special result (for example, a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V prize after a small win) in a specific game state It differs from the game value given to the player when the game results in a special result after the state ends.

In such a gaming machine 10, since there is a difference in the game value given as a special result of the game between during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends, a game value given during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends The player will be happy and sad about the number of starting memories in which the game is executed, and the interest in the game will be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (normal pattern variation display game). The gaming machine 10 is a variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted to an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is a specific result (normal pattern hit). Prepare. The game control means can convert the variable winning device to the open state a plurality of times by deriving one specific result (per normal pattern), and the probability that the game will result in a specific result (per normal pattern) is high. The variable winning device can be converted to the open state in both the high probability state and the low probability state.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability that the game will result in a specific result (normal hit) is low, the variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electric) can be converted to the open state, and the variable winning Since the start memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) generated by the winning of the device can be accumulated, the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and effect control means (for example, the effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game. Prepare. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electrical) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, time saving state or probability variable state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state (for example, a right-handed state with a low probability of normal pattern) even after the specific game state ends, and the effect control means
A performance mode in a prescribed state is made different from a performance mode in other than the prescribed state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined state in which the variable prize winning device is changed to the open state can be visually distinguished from the specific game state in terms of presentation. In addition, by setting the effect mode peculiar to the predetermined state, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special figure variable display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable winning device, without digesting the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) that is the execution right of the game (special figure variation display game),
The starting memory can be accumulated by winning a variable winning device.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variable display game) for a long time corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device, and executes the game for a short time corresponding to the closed state of the variable winning device. can be run with Therefore, the open state of the variable winning device during the specific game state (for example, the first half open)
Accumulate a lot of starting memory (e.g. special figure 2 hold), then digest a lot of starting memory (e.g. special figure 2 hold) in the subsequent closed state (e.g. interval), open again after the specific game state (e.g. second half open ) can accumulate a lot of starting memory (eg special figure 2 hold). For this reason, the number of starting memories consumed after the end of the specific game state (remaining pending number) is set to the upper limit of the number of starting memories (for example, 4)
can be more than Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variation display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device for a time longer than the open state time of the variable winning device. Therefore,
Even if the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) are different, the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations is not more or less than the specified remaining number of reservations. match.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special figure variation display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period in which the variable prize winning device is in the closed state. Therefore, even if the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) are deviated, the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations exceeds the specified number of remaining reservations. Matches perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means is such that the game (special figure variation display game) is played a predetermined number of times (
For example, it controls so that the specific game state ends when the time saving number of times or probability variable number of times) is executed. After the end of the specific game state, the number of times the game is executed based on the starting memory generated by winning the variable winning device (prescribed remaining pending number 5 to 9) is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times ). Therefore, if the predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the remaining number of reservations is also set randomly and variable, and the remaining number of reservations makes the player happy and sad, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines that the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result (
A predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of time saving or the number of times of variable probability) can be set as the game value given to the player in the case of a small win or a big win, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type (symbol) of the special result. Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game state based on the special result is set by lottery (distribution) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes at random, improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means, the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state (specified remaining pending number), a predetermined number of times is constant (eg 10). Therefore, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. During the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, if the same performance mode is executed while the fixed number of special figure 2 variable display games are executed, the player is in the specific game state or after the end of the specific game state. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is or not, and it is surprising that a large game value can be obtained with a big hit of the remaining reservation after the end of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the starting memory generated by the winning of a game ball into a predetermined winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36), and the winning of a game ball into the variable winning device A second game can be executed based on the generated starting memory. The second game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is changed to the first game (special figure 1
In addition, when the first game is executed in the specific game state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times the first game (special figure 1 variation display game) is executed in the specific game state decreases, and the first game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed in the specific game state
is executed, the start of the second game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is not greatly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) and a second game (
Special figure fluctuation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), and by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) A second game (special figure variation display game) can be executed based on the generated starting memory. In the specific game state, during the execution of the first game and during the winning state caused by the specific result of the first game, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), the first It does not generate the starting memory (general map memory), which is the right to execute the game.

Therefore, the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) can be started only during the stop display, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (normal pattern start gate 34) during the stop display. do. In this way, the starting memory (normal pattern memory) of the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game)
is not accumulated substantially, the first game (normal pattern variation display game) is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the operation of the variable prize winning device according to the hit of the first game (ordinary figure variation display game) and the second game (special figure variation display game) can be easily interlocked without deviation.

In the first embodiment, the game control means terminates the specific game state when the open state of the variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) ends a specified number of times (for example, twice) in the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific game state is extended by making the number of winnings to the variable winning device less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the probability variable number of times) due to the stop shot. Further, it is possible to prevent the number of open states of the variable prize winning device from being excessively increased due to the winning of the first game (normal pattern variable display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the game execution time (variation time) based on the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed from the end of the special game state. Therefore,
A game (special figure fluctuation display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device, and a starting memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) can be accumulated.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result (for example, a small win or a big win, including a big win by V winning after a small win) , a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player can be generated. The game machine 10 can be converted between an open state and a closed state, and a variable winning device ( It is provided with a normal variable winning device 37, a normal electric). The variable winning device differs in operation mode (support state, support mode) after the end of the special game state according to the type (symbol) of the special result.

Therefore, depending on the type of special result (symbol), the number of remaining reservations, which is the number of times the game (special variable display game) is executed after the specific game state, the continuation rate of the specific game state, etc.
Varies depending on For this reason, the player has come to pay attention to the type (symbol) of the special result,
The interest in the game is also improved.

In the modification of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). After the end of the special game state, the game control means sets the game execution time and the game stop time according to the number of game executions. A pattern of execution time and stop time according to the number of game executions is set according to the operation mode (support state AC) of the variable winning device. Therefore, depending on the type of special result (symbol) and thus the operation mode of the variable winning device (support state AC), the game after the specific game state (special figure variation display game)
The remaining pending number, which is the number of executions of

In the modification of the first embodiment, the game control means, when the special result is of a predetermined type (symbol E or symbol F), sets the operation mode of the variable winning device after the special game state to a plurality of operations. It is decided by lottery (lottery for the pattern per normal pattern) from the mode. Therefore, if the special result is of a predetermined type (symbol E or symbol F), there is no prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the player cannot predict the actual number of remaining reservations. Since the game can be played with a sense of anticipation for the numbers, the interest in the game is improved.

In the modification of the first embodiment, the game control means determines the period of the open state and the period of the closed state of the variable winning device during or after the specific game state as the type of special result (symbols BD).
can vary depending on Therefore, it is possible to change the number of remaining reserves according to the type of special result (symbols BD) and the operation mode of the general electricity (support state AC).

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. second
The embodiment relates to the display mode of the holding display (starting memory display) corresponding to the second starting memory during or after the time saving state (general electric support state, electric power support) as a specific game state.

[Example of screen transition from time-saving state to after time-saving state]
With reference to FIGS. 78-80, the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the 2nd starting memory after the time saving state from the time saving state is demonstrated.

FIG. 78 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state. Moreover, FIG. 79 is an example (middle stage) of the screen transition after the time saving state from the time saving state, and FIG. 80 is an example (second half) of the screen transition after the time saving state from the time saving state.

(A) of FIG. 78 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first start memory generated before the big hit after the time saving state after the big hit ends. be.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41 . In the variable display area 610, the left area 6
In 10A, the first decoration pattern A (identification information, pattern, special decoration pattern), the first decoration pattern B in the right area 610B, and the first decoration pattern C in the middle area 610C are enlarged and displayed in large patterns. and displayed in a variable manner (“↓↓↓”).

At the upper right corner of the display screen, there is provided a variable display area 615 in which a variable display game is executed with decorative special symbols (small symbols). The small patterns in the variable display area 615 are variable-displayed (“↓↓↓”) in a normal variable manner. The results of the variable display in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 have contents that match each other. Also, when the variable display game is being executed, at least one of the variable display areas 610 and 615 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the time saving state, the variable display area 6
Only small patterns may be variably displayed in the variable display area 615 in the upper right corner without displaying the 10 decorative first designs A to C. In this way, during the specific game state such as the time saving state, the variable display area 610
By not displaying the variation display related to the special figure 1 variation display game with the decoration first symbols A to C, the special figure 1 variation display game which is the main game in the normal game state and the special figure 1 variation display game which is the main game in the specific game state It becomes easy for the player to distinguish the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a game, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the time saving state, the immediately preceding stop symbol, that is, the big hit symbol may remain displayed in the first ornamental symbols A to C of the variable display area 610, The default (initial state) pattern (for example, "123
”), etc., may be displayed.

In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 are provided. Special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 and special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660
In, respectively, the number "1" indicating the number of special figures 1 reserved and the number "0" indicating the number of special figures 2 reserved are displayed.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, a start memory display area (specific display section, specific display area)
As a square-frame pending digestion area 640 (varying pending display area) and a second pending display portion 630b
is provided.

In the reserved digestion area 640, a suspended display (starting memory display, special figure 1 Suspension display 633w during fluctuation is displayed as suspension display, suspension display during special figure fluctuation, suspension display during special figure digestion. That is, there are two first starting memories that occurred before the big hit, and the holding display corresponding to the starting memory (old starting memory) that occurred first among the two first starting memories is the pending display 6 during fluctuation.
33w.

In addition, the later generated starting memory (new starting memory) of the two first starting memories is waiting without being digested, and the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number of the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is the above becomes "1". It should be noted that the variable pending display 633w corresponding to the first start memory and the pending digestion region 640 in which the variable pending display 633w is displayed may be hidden in the time saving state.

In the second pending display portion 630b, a pending display (starting memory display, special figure 2 pending display, standby pending display) corresponding to the generated second starting memory (special figure 2 pending) is displayed. For example, in (a) of FIG. 78, which has just entered the time-saving state immediately after the end of the big hit, the second start memory has not occurred yet, and the pending display corresponding to the second start memory is not displayed (0 pieces). Also, the start memory of the main variable display game in the specific game state such as the time saving state is the second start memory. note that,
As in the first embodiment, one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is determined as the main variation display game depending on the game state and the like.

In addition, in the starting memory display area at the bottom of the display screen, the first pending display portion 630a in which the pending display corresponding to the first starting memory is displayed is hidden. Hold display is not displayed during time saving state. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state, the effect control device 300 replaces the second reservation display portion 630b with the first reservation display portion 63.
0a can be displayed at the bottom of the display screen (specific display section). That is, the starting memory of the main variable display game in the normal game state is the first starting memory.

Moreover, you may make it the production|presentation control apparatus 300 display a right-handed display (right-handed instruction|indication image) until a 2nd starting memory generate|occur|produces after entering a time saving state. Further, even after the occurrence of the second starting memory, the right-handed display may be continuously displayed when the right-handed player is in the right-handed state. Since the player is playing a right-handed game during the jackpot game (special game), the effect control device 300 may not display the right-handed display unless the player is left-handed.

(I) of FIG. 78 shows the display device 41 when a plurality of second starting memories occur after the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as shown in (A) of FIG. 78 based on the first starting memory. is the display screen.

A second start memory is generated by winning a game ball in the second start prize opening (start opening 2, second start prize area) of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, general electric). At that time, for example, when three second start memories occur as shown in FIG. At the same time, suspension displays 633x, 633y, and 633z are displayed in the second suspension display portion 630b.

Suspension displays 633x, 633y, and 633z displayed in the second suspension display portion 630b are the first
It is displayed in a predetermined display mode (eg, "▽") different from the display mode (eg, "◯") of the pending display 633w corresponding to the start memory. In addition, the pending display and shape of the first start memory ("○" and "
▽”, etc.), the color, pattern, size, etc. may be varied as a predetermined display mode. Therefore, since the hold display corresponding to the first start memory and the hold display corresponding to the second start memory are displayed in different display modes, the player can determine which start memory the hold display corresponds to. becomes easier.

In addition, below the pending displays 633x, 633y, and 633z, a rectangular square frame (for example, "□
”) is displayed. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the pedestal of the square frame, the reservation display 6
It can be recognized that 33x, 633y, and 633z are special pending indications, and the sense of anticipation can be heightened. The special pending display becomes a pending display corresponding to the first remaining pending display described later, and the effect is switched to a predetermined effect mode when the variable display game is executed based on the special pending display. In addition, in FIG. 78 (b) and the figures described later, an explanation "new" is shown above the suspension display so that it can be seen that it is a newly generated suspension display, but the display device 41 The character "new" may be actually displayed on the display screen to inform the player that a new pending display has occurred.

FIG. 78(C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game executed in FIG. 78(A) and (I) stops varying.

For example, as shown in (c) of FIG. 78, the variable display game is a missing symbol (for example, "358
”), the next variable display game is executed according to the hold (starting memory) during standby. In addition, in FIG. 78(c), the second start memory is newly generated, and the suspension display 633 is displayed in the second suspension display portion 630b. The number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 is "4". In the following explanation, it is assumed that all stop results of the variable display game are lost.

In addition, if the stop result of the variable display game results in a big win or a small win, the effects associated with the big win or small win will be shown in the following explanation (fanfare effect, directing how to hit to aim for V prize, etc.) It shall be possible to transition to In addition, the variable time value of the variable display game in the case of an effect associated with a big win or a small win is set longer than the variable time value in the case of a loss,
The effect control device 300 can execute a dedicated effect as the effect. Also, the variable time value in the case of a big hit or a loss may be a fixed value (fixed variable time value).

Also, since the special figure 1 variation display game will be executed first before the second start memory is generated, it becomes easier to accumulate the second start memory during the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, when switching to a predetermined effect mode (predetermined effect stage), the player can easily continuously visually recognize a series of effects (continuous effects) by the plurality of second start memories without interruption, thereby improving the game. You can increase your interest. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes the special figure 1 variation display game in the time saving state with shortening variation (fixed variation time value). Therefore, since the variation can be stopped without delaying the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game can be started quickly, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Also, when the special figure 1 variable display game stops varying, if there is a second start memory waiting, the square frame of the pending digestion area 640 changes, and the special display for digesting the second start memory Switch to a frame (e.g. "convex pedestal"). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the next variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and to heighten the sense of anticipation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect control device 300, in (C) of FIG.
Although 0a is not displayed, the first suspension display portion 630a may be displayed together with the second suspension display portion 630b to display the suspension display corresponding to the first start memory. In addition, the display mode (frame) of the pending digestion area 640 includes a display mode for the pending display of the first starting memory (square frame, for example, "□") and a display mode for the pending display of the second starting memory (dedicated frame , For example, "convex pedestal") may not be separated, and a common display mode, for example, a display mode for holding display of the second start memory (dedicated frame, for example, "convex pedestal"). may

(E) of FIG. 78 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the second start memory after the special figure 1 variation display game. Game control device 100
can execute the special figure 2 variation display game by giving priority to the second starting memory over the waiting (storing) first starting memory (special figure 2 priority variation).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the variable display area 6
The 10 decoration first patterns A to C and the small patterns in the variable display area 615 are variably displayed ("↓↓↓"). In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started, the pending display 633x, 633y, 633z, and 633 displayed in the second pending display unit 630b moves one by one to the left (holding shift), and the second One pending display 633x at the left end of the 2 pending display portion 630b moves to the pending digestion area 640, and a variable pending display 633x is displayed on the convex pedestal of the pending digestion area 640.

In addition, the effect control device 300, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed during the time saving state,
It is possible to switch the production to the production mode (short time mode, short time stage) corresponding to the short time state. It should be noted that, when it becomes a time-saving state, when the first variable display game during the time-saving state, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed ((a) of FIG. 78), in the production mode corresponding to the time-saving state You can change the performance.

Also, in FIG. 78 (e), a new pending display 633a occurs, special figure 2 pending number display unit 6
The number indicating the number of 60 special figures 2 pending is "4".

In the pending change display 633x of the pending digestion area 640, for example, characters such as "remaining 4" are displayed to notify the player of the remaining number of times of the predetermined effect mode. As shown in FIG. 78(d), the number indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed integrally with the pending change display 633x, and the "remaining" may be displayed above the pending change display 633x. According to such a display mode, since only the number indicating the remaining number of times can be switched according to the pending shift, it becomes easy to understand which number is displayed corresponding to the variable pending display, and the predetermined It becomes easier for the player to accurately grasp the remaining number of performance modes.

In the case of displaying the pending digestion area 640 in the common display mode, when the pending display of the first starting memory is displayed in the pending digestion area 640, the characters indicating the remaining number of times such as "4 remaining" are not displayed. can be In addition, when the pending display of the first start memory is displayed in the pending digestion area 640, the characters for notifying the remaining number of times are displayed in an inconspicuous display mode such as translucent or gray so that the player cannot easily gaze at them. can be displayed as

In addition, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving is set to once, and the change pending display 633
When the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to x stops varying, the time saving state ends (time saving ends),
The game state shifts to the transition state. Then, the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending) that occurred during the time saving state (during the time saving) but was not digested during the time saving is digested in the transition state after the end of the time saving as a remaining hold. be done. In (e) of FIG. 78, the pending displays corresponding to the remaining pending are pending displays 633y, 633x, 633, and 633a. Therefore, in the transition state, while the same big hit probability and normal pattern probability as in the normal game state, it becomes an advantageous state that easily generates a small hit with a small hit probability (for example, 1/8) by digesting the remaining reservation. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the transition state may be included in the normal game state in terms of probability, or may be handled separately from the normal game state because it is an advantageous state. In addition, the player can pass V during the small hit (
A big hit can be generated by passing a game ball to the V winning opening, V winning) (1 type 2
seed mixer).

Here, in the first embodiment, all the second starting memory (special figure 2 hold) digested after the end of the time saving is called the remaining hold, but in the second embodiment, for example, occurs during the time saving and after the end of the time saving The special figure 2 hold to be digested is called a predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold, time saving residual hold), and the special figure 2 hold that occurs after the time saving ends is called an excessive hold (second remaining hold, excessive remaining hold) you can call

Also, for example, in the second embodiment, the first predetermined number of the special figure 2 hold generated during the time saving and digested after the end of the time saving is called a predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold), and after the predetermined remaining hold The special figure 2 hold that is digested may be called excessive hold (second remaining hold).

After execution of the variable display game related to the predetermined remaining reserve, when the execution of the variable display game related to the excessive reserve is started, the effect is switched from a predetermined effect mode (predetermined effect stage) to another effect mode. Therefore, in other words, the predetermined remaining hold is the remaining hold in which the variable display game is executed during the predetermined production mode, and the excessive hold is the remaining hold in which the variable display game is executed during the other production mode. Become.

For example, in (e) of FIG. 78, a pending display 63 that occurs during the time saving and is digested after the time saving ends
3y, 633x, 633, and 633a are holding displays corresponding to predetermined remaining holding (first remaining holding, occurrence remaining holding during time saving). In addition, the predetermined remaining hold in this case (first remaining hold, short-time occurrence remaining hold)
is, for example, four.

(O) in FIG. 78 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first first remaining reservation after the end of the time saving.

When the execution of the variable display game based on the first remaining hold is started, the production control device 300 can switch the production from the time reduction mode to a predetermined production mode, for example, a time reduction during occurrence remaining hold consumption mode in a transition state.

The occurrence remaining hold digestion mode during time saving is a mode for digesting the first remaining hold (predetermined remaining hold, occurrence remaining hold during time saving) that occurs during time saving and is digested after the end of time saving.

When a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the first residual hold is digested in the time saving residual hold digestion mode, the excess hold digestion that digests the subsequent holds (excessive hold, second residual hold, excess residual hold) mode(
The production shifts to the first production).

In addition, there is a residual pending digestion mode in a transitional state as a mode consisting of the residual pending digestion mode occurring during the time saving and the excessive pending digestion mode.

For example, the production in the time-saving mode, which is a predetermined production mode, can be executed as a series of productions related to the production in the time-saving mode executed immediately before, the story, the characters that appear, and the like. Therefore, a scenario developed (displayed, played back) over a plurality of variable display games executed based on the second reserve of the special figure digested during the time saving and the first remaining hold digested after the end of the time saving can be visually recognized by the player as a series of presentations, and the player can enjoy a more complicated presentation with a deeper story, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, the production mode in the advantageous state such as the transition state and the specific game state (shortening of working hours mode, remaining hold digestion mode during shortening of working hours of the remaining hold digestion mode) is the same production mode without dividing it as a common production mode good.

Also, for example, after the end of the time saving, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, and the normal variable winning device 37 is further hit (when the low probability of the normal variable is greater than 0%). 37b is opened, and when the game ball wins the normal variable prize winning device 37, the second remaining hold occurs, and as shown in (O) of FIG. 78, a hold display 633b corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed. (displayed as “new”). The case where the normal variable winning device 37 is opened even after the time saving ends is, for example, when the normal variable winning device 37 is open at the time of the time saving end and the open state continues slightly even after the time saving ends, or the first implementation This is the case of opening the latter half of the form. Reservation display 633b corresponding to the second remaining reservation is a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first
Excess residual hold to be digested in overhold digestion mode, which transitions after the residual hold is digested.

At the bottom of the pending display 633z, 633, 633a corresponding to the first remaining pending, a rectangular frame (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal is displayed, while the pending display 63 corresponding to the second remaining pending
At the bottom of 3b, the rectangular square frame serving as the base is not displayed. Therefore, since it becomes easy to distinguish the reservation display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining reservation, it is easy for the player to recognize how far the production by the time saving generation remaining reservation consumption mode is performed as a predetermined production mode. can. Furthermore, the character "Last" can be displayed on the base of the pending display 633a so as to make it easier to distinguish the pending display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining pending.

In addition, the character (mode remaining number) displayed in the variable pending display 633y of the pending digestion area 640 for informing the player of the remaining number of times in the predetermined effect mode is switched to, for example, "remaining 3". Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize how many more times the effect in the time-saving production remaining hold consumption mode as the predetermined effect mode will be performed.

FIG. 78 (ka) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second first remaining reservation after the end of the time saving.

After the hold shift, when the special figure 2 change display game is executed based on the second start memory corresponding to the second first remaining hold, ie, the change hold display 633z, the change hold of the hold digest area 640 The mode remaining count displayed in the display 633z is switched to, for example, "remaining 2". In addition, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the second remaining reservation occurs, and the reservation display 633c corresponding to the second remaining reservation is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). In addition, in the remaining hold digestion mode after the end of time saving (residual hold digestion mode occurring during time saving and excessive hold digestion mode), digestion hold (variable hold display) and standby hold hold shift production may be omitted .

FIG. 79 (ki) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reservation after the end of the time saving.

After the hold shift, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second start memory corresponding to the third first remaining hold, that is, the variable hold display 633 as in FIG. The mode remaining number of times displayed in the change pending display 633 of the digest area 640 is switched to, for example, "one remaining time". In addition, a hold display 633d corresponding to the new second remaining hold is displayed in the second hold display section 63.
0b (displayed as "new").

FIG. 79(c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining hold after the end of the time saving.

After the hold shift, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in the same manner as in FIG. For example, if the number of remaining modes displayed in the change pending display 633a of the digest area 640 is "remaining 0"
switch to

In the second pending display portion 630b, there are three pending displays 633b and 633 corresponding to the second remaining pending.
c, 633d are displayed. The number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 is
3”.

In (ke) of FIG. 79, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation,
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second start memory (special figure 2 pending) occurs after (c) in FIG. 79 .

When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the second remaining hold of the second start memory occurs, and the holding display 633e corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). In addition, the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "4". Then, the number of the first remaining reservations on standby becomes zero, and the number of the second remaining reservations becomes four.

In (here) of FIG. 79, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation,
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when transitioning to the result screen 670 after (v) of FIG. 79 .

The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation, that is, the last (latest) first remaining reservation, and in the second half of the fluctuation, the effect control device 300 displays the display screen of the display device 41. It is possible to display a result screen 670 showing the game results for a predetermined period (result display).
. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the fourth first remaining hold is being executed, and (
In this), the production mode continues in the time saving mode. In addition, it is not limited to this, and at the time of the result display, the occurrence remaining retention digestion mode during time saving may end and transition to the excessive retention digestion mode which is another production mode.

In this way, the effect control device 300 displays the result during the execution of the variation display game based on the latest first remaining hold when all the variation display games in the time saving mode to the time saving remaining hold consumption mode are lost. It can be performed.

The result screen 670 displays the number of game balls obtained in the most recent (latest) jackpot, the number of game balls obtained in a series of jackpots after the first hit (first normal jackpot), the number of jackpots in a series, and the contents of the jackpot. (normal jackpot, jackpot due to V winning during time saving or transition state, contents of production at the time of jackpot occurrence) etc. can be displayed. A series of jackpots includes, for example, all jackpots that occur while the right-handed state continues.

Also, the effect control device 300 hides the variable display area 610, the second pending display portion 630b, and the pending digestion area 640 during the result display. Therefore, the result screen 670 can be displayed in a large size on the display screen, making it easier for the player to view the result screen 670.
It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, the variable display area 615, the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650, the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660
The display of is maintained, and the player can check the fluctuating symbols, the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the number of special figures 2 reserved.

Note that the result screen 670 may be displayed at the timing ((sa) in FIG. 79) when the variable display game based on the first (first) second remaining reserve is started. Also, the second
When the remaining hold is not on standby, the result screen 670 may be hidden at the timing when the last variable display game based on the first remaining hold stops changing (immediately after (ko) in FIG. 79).

FIG. 79 (sa) is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation during the result display.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the first second remaining hold, the effect is changed from a predetermined production mode (residual hold digestion mode occurring during time saving) to an excessive hold digestion mode, which is another production mode. can be switched. Also, even if the effect is switched to the excessive hold digestion mode, the display device 41
, the display of the result screen 670 is maintained. Therefore, the result screen 67
The player can secure sufficient time to confirm the game result displayed at 0.

Also, by executing the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation, the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "3".

Note that the state in which the result screen 670 is displayed in the excessive pending digestion mode may be called a result mode.

() in FIG. 79 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops fluctuating.

For example, when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold stops, the result mode ends, and as shown in FIG. The game stops fluctuating at a lost symbol (for example, "267"). That is, the effect control device 300, until the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second remaining reservation is executed once,
A result screen 670 can be displayed. It should be noted that the switching timing of the display from the result screen 670 (the trigger of the screen transition) is the starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area, starting opening 1
) or the timing when the game ball wins or passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 (normal symbol start gate).

79, the result screen 670 is hidden, and the first pending display portion 630a and the pending digestion area 640 are displayed. In this way, the result screen 670 started to be displayed during the variable display game based on the final first remaining hold is the first (first) second
It is hidden at the timing when the fluctuation display game based on the remaining hold stops fluctuation. In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the first pending display portion 630a to display the second remaining pending on standby, while the result screen 670 and the pending digestion region 640 are hidden to display the second remaining pending on standby. Suspension (suspension display during fluctuation) may be hidden.

(S) of FIG. 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed based on the second second remaining reservation.

The performance control device 300 switches the performance from the result mode to the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage) during the excessive reservation consumption mode, hides the result screen 670, and displays the variable display area 610 on the display screen. That is, the over-reserved digestion mode can be divided into a result mode and a special mode.

In the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game for digesting the second remaining hold is relatively short compared to the average value of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal game state. Runs at variable time (fixed variable time value). Also, the background and stage of the display screen in the special mode may be a dedicated background and stage different from those in the normal game state, or may be the same as those in the normal game state.

In addition, in the special mode, the first suspension display section 63 is displayed without displaying the second suspension display section 630b.
0a is displayed. Then, the displayed first start memory (special figure 1 pending) pending display 633f
remains on standby in the first reservation display portion 630a without being digested, and the hidden second start memory (
Special figure 2 pending) is preferentially digested (special figure 2 priority change). In addition, the special figure 2 reservation number can be easily confirmed from the number "2" displayed in the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660.

Also, in the pending digestion region 640, a pending display 633c (for example, "▽") corresponding to the second second remaining pending is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees that the hold display 633f of the first hold display portion 630a does not shift to hold and that the hold display 633c of the second remaining hold is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 is fluctuating in the special mode. It can be easily recognized that the variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game. Thus, the starting memory of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the special mode is the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending)
become.

It should be noted that the second remaining hold (variable hold display 633c) displayed in the hold digest area 640 may be hidden, and as shown in FIG. Special figure 1 pending) may be displayed in the same display mode (for example, "○").

(S) of FIG. 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed based on the third second remaining reservation, and (S) of FIG. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed based on the second remaining reservation.

As shown in FIG. 80, the third second remaining hold, that is, the change pending display 633d
A special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the same way as (su) in FIG. becomes "1".

Also, as shown in FIG. 80, the fourth second remaining hold, that is, the change pending display 6
The special figure 2 variable display game is similarly executed based on the second start memory corresponding to 33e, and the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "0".

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second remaining hold in the result mode or special mode shown in (sa) of FIG. 79 to (ta) of FIG. 80 is executed with a shortened fluctuation (fixed fluctuation time value) .

That is, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second remaining reservation is a special figure 2 variation display game during time saving ((e) in FIG. 78) and a special figure 2 variation display game based on the first remaining reservation (FIG. 78 The (o) ~
Compared to (ko) in FIG. 79, the fluctuation time is shorter and the fluctuation ends earlier (stops fluctuation).

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second remaining hold is faster than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ((a) to (c) in FIG. 78) that is executed during the time saving. finish.

Therefore, after a series of effects in the time-saving mode and the time-saving residual hold digestion mode are completed, the second residual hold is quickly digested in the excessive hold digestion mode (first production), and the normal mode (second
production) can be returned. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the transition state from being prolonged, and the game can be progressed at a good tempo, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed during the time saving is also finished earlier than the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during the time saving and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the first remaining hold. . Therefore, while suppressing the delay of the special figure 1 variation display game executed at the time of the time saving start, the special figure 2 suspension can be accumulated and the special figure 2 variation display game can be started quickly. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to continuously visually recognize a series of effects accompanying the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game without interruption, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

(Ta) of FIG. 80 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game based on the fourth second remaining reservation stops variation.

For example, as shown in (da) of FIG. 80, the variable display game is a missing symbol (for example, "416
”), the suspended display 633e during variation of the suspended digestion area 640 is hidden,
The number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "0".

When the second remaining reservation is completely consumed, the special mode ends and the presentation is switched to the normal mode.
In addition, a left-handed hitting display 671 (left-handed hitting instruction image) is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The left-handed display 671 is a display for instructing the player to hit left-handed.

In addition, the left-handed display 671 is not limited to when the second remaining hold is completely consumed, but after the time saving ends (
(O) in FIG. 78 may be displayed. In addition, the left-handed display 671 is the timing of (this) in FIG. 79 when the result screen 670 is displayed, the timing of (sa) in FIG. 80 (su)
may be displayed at the timing of

(C) in FIG. 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first start memory (special figure 1 pending).

Due to the hold shift, the variable hold display 633f corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is moved from the first hold display unit 630a to the hold digestion area 640 and displayed, and the special figure 1 change display game is based on the special figure 1 hold is executed.

(1) in FIG. 80 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game stops varying.

After that, for example, as shown in (3) of FIG. 80, when the fluctuation display game stops fluctuating with a lost symbol (for example, "521"), the special figure 1 reserve and the special figure 2 reserve are all consumed.
After that, the next variable display game is started by generating the first starting memory or the second starting memory.

In addition, in the normal mode (left-handed) where the normal variable winning device 37 is difficult to open, it is usually difficult for the second starting memory to occur, and the player starts the variable display game based on the first starting memory. In addition, it is usually aimed to win the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1).

Also, in the normal mode in which the first start memory usually occurs, if the second start memory occurs (when the low probability of the normal pattern is greater than 0%), FIG. ) during the result display and during the special mode of FIG.
The suspension display portion 630b may be displayed to display the suspension display corresponding to the generated second start memory. As a result, the player can recognize that the second starting memory has occurred in the normal mode.

Conversely, if the second starting memory occurs in normal mode (if the low probability of the normal pattern is greater than 0%), during the result display of FIG. 79 (ko) (sa) or FIG. As in (the) special mode, the effect control device 300 does not display the second suspension display section 630b, and the generated second
The pending display corresponding to the starting memory may not be displayed. Thus, even if the second starting memory occurs in the normal mode, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

[Example of screen transition from time saving state on 100 time saving machine]
With reference to Drawing 81, a display mode of a suspension display corresponding to the 2nd start memory from a time saving state in a time saving 100 times machine is explained. 78 to 80 will be omitted as appropriate in the following description.

FIG. 81 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition from the time saving state in the time saving 100 times machine. In addition, the time saving 100 times machine (time saving machine) is
A general gaming machine capable of transitioning to a time saving state (specific game state) and capable of generating a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of time saving state (general electric support state) after a big hit.

(ha) of FIG. 81 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed after the game state has changed to the time-saving state after the end of the big hit.

The pending digestion area 640 is switched to a dedicated frame (for example, a “convex pedestal”) for digesting the second starting memory, and on the convex pedestal, a variable pending display 633v is displayed as special figure 2 pending (
is displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second starting memory).

In the pending display 633v during change of the pending digestion area 640, for example, a character that informs the player of the remaining number of times of the time saving mode (time saving remaining number of times) such as "remaining 99" is displayed. In addition, Fig. 81
In (ha) and the figures to be described later, the description "Time saving x times" is illustrated at the top of the second holding display unit 630b so that the number of times saving time can be understood, but on the display screen of the display device 41 " Time saving x
The number of time reductions may be reported to the player by actually displaying the characters "Time". By informing the number of times of time saving in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize how many times the variable display game is currently in the time saving state, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the second suspension display portion 630b displays a suspension display 633u in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second starting memory. At the bottom of the pending display 633u, the pending display 6
A rectangular square (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal is displayed as a predetermined display mode indicating that 33u is consumed during time saving. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize until which hold display the time saving state continues, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In (H) of FIG. 81, after that, the special figure 2 variable display game is repeated in the time saving state, and the time saving 9
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fifth special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

In the variable suspension display 633w of the suspension digestion area 640, for example, the remaining number of times of shortening time such as "remaining 5" is displayed. Further, in the second suspension display portion 630b, suspension displays 633x, 633y, and 633z are displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second starting memory. Below the suspension displays 633x, 633y, and 633z, a pedestal (for example, "□") in a predetermined display mode indicating that it will be consumed during time saving is displayed in the same manner as the suspension display 633u described above.

(2) of FIG. 81 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game executed in (H) of FIG. 81 stops varying.

For example, as shown in (c2) of FIG. 81, the variable display game is a winning symbol (for example, "35
8"), the next variable display game will be executed according to the suspension (starting memory) during standby, as in FIG. 78(c). Also, in (2) of FIG. 81, the second
A start memory is generated, and the suspension display 633 is displayed on the second suspension display portion 630b.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game stops varying, until the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory next to the standby is executed, the suspension display during variation is displayed in the suspension digestion area 640. is not displayed, and only a dedicated frame (for example, a "convex pedestal") for digesting the second starting memory is displayed. In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute the special figure 2 variable display game based on the next second start memory after performing the shift effect of the reserved shift (the effect of shifting the reserved shift), and perform the shift effect. The special figure 2 variable display game may be executed after instantly switching the hold display to the next position (position after the hold shift). In addition, while the fluctuation is stopped, a pending display with a different color and transparency from the variable pending display during fluctuation is displayed in the pending digestion area 640, and the next time-saving remaining number of times (for example, "remaining 4") is displayed. good too.

(E2) of FIG. 81 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the 96th time-saving special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

In the variable pending display 633x of the pending digestion area 640, for example, the remaining number of times of shortening time such as “remaining 4” is displayed. In addition, the second suspension display portion 630b newly displays a suspension display 633a in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second start memory.

Here, the effect control device 300, as shown in (E2) of FIG.
It is possible to display characters "Last" on the pedestal (for example, "□") at the bottom of 3a to notify that the time-saving state is finished. Therefore, even if the player does not pay attention to the portion displaying the remaining number of times, the player can recognize the timing of the end of the time saving from the reserved display, so that the flow of the game can be easily grasped and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

(O2) of FIG. 81 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the 97th time saving special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

In the second pending display portion 630b, a pending display 633 corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 pending)
b is newly displayed. The suspension display 633b is the remaining suspension (predetermined remaining suspension, first remaining suspension, remaining suspension occurring during time saving) that will be digested in the transition state (normal game state in terms of probability) that transitions after the time saving state ends is. In this way, when the remaining number of times of time saving becomes three times or less, the remaining suspension to be digested after the end of time saving starts to accumulate in the second suspension display section 630b.

In addition, the remaining hold digested after the end of the time saving is the second start memory, and the jackpot symbol random number of the second start memory has a higher probability of occurrence of a probability variation state than the jackpot symbol random number of the first start memory. It is distributed. Therefore, it can be said that the transition state in which the remaining hold is digested (during the remaining hold digestion mode) is a normal game state in terms of probability, but it is an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may also display a pedestal (for example, "□") as a predetermined display mode at the bottom of the newly displayed pending display 633b. Even with such a display mode,
The player can visually recognize the characters "Last" on the pedestal under the holding display 633a, and can recognize the timing of the time saving end from the holding display. In addition, the display mode of the hold display is the same for the hold that is digested during the time saving and the remaining hold that is digested after the end of the time saving, so that uniformity increases.
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the presentation in the time saving mode, and to increase the interest of the game.

(or 2) of FIG. 81 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the 98th time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

In the second pending display portion 630b, a pending display 633 corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 pending)
c is newly displayed. The hold display 633c is also the remaining hold like the hold display 633b.

After that, when the 99th time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the same screen transition as in FIG. The screen transition is the same as (ke). And the production control device 300 (
d) A result screen 670 may be displayed as shown in transition.

In addition, in the screen transition example of (Ki) to (Ke) in FIG. I explained that it is the second remaining hold of the remaining hold. However, if the transition from (or 2) in FIG. 81 to (Ki) to (Ke) in FIG.
33b, 633c, 633d, and 633e become the first remaining hold (residual hold) that occurs during the time saving and is digested after the time saving ends. Since the special figure 2 variation display game based on the 4 remaining reserves can be executed after 100 times of time reduction, the player can play the special figure 2 variation display game a total of 104 times (100 + 4 times) and aim for a big hit. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Screen transition example in a modified example of special figure 2 pending display]
With reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, as a display mode of a modified example of the special figure 2 reserved display, a display mode in which the result display until all consumption of the special figure 2 reservation is continued will be described. It should be noted that the modifications up to FIG.
It becomes a modification of the special figure 2 pending display in 0.

FIG. 82 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition in the modification of the special figure 2 pending display. FIG. 83 is an example (second half) of screen transition in a modification of special figure 2 pending display.

FIG. 82 (Ki 2) is the display of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining hold in the time saving during the occurrence hold digestion mode after the end of the time saving. is the screen.

After the hold shift, when the special figure 2 change display game is executed based on the change hold display 633 of the third first remaining hold (second start memory), the change hold display 633 of the hold digest area 640
The number of remaining modes displayed in is, for example, "remaining 1". In addition, special figure 1 reservation number display unit 65
The number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number of 0 is "1", and the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 is "4". That is, in FIG. 82 (Ki 2), the same special figure 1 reservation number and special figure 2 reservation number as (Ki) in FIG. are three.

Here, the effect control device 300 displays the first remaining hold pending display 633a, but does not display the three second remaining pending pending displays, as shown in FIG. 82 (K2). therefore,
Since only the first remaining hold (holding display 633a) is displayed, until which hold is digested, the game determines whether the production by the predetermined production mode (time saving during the transition state occurring remaining hold digestion mode) is executed This makes it easier for the player to grasp the game, and enhances the interest in the game. Moreover, since only the first remaining suspension having strong relevance to the performance to be executed is displayed, effective performance can be performed, and the second remaining suspension having weak relevance is not displayed, thus hindering the performance. can be suppressed and the player can easily concentrate on the performance, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that although the second remaining pending display is not displayed in the figures after (Ki 2) in FIG. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of special figures 2 reserved.

FIG. 82 (ku 2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation after the time saving ends.

After the hold shift, special figure 2 based on the change pending display 633a which is the fourth first remaining hold
The variable display game is executed in the same manner as in (2) of FIG. 82, and the mode remaining count displayed in the variable pending display 633a of the pending digestion area 640 is switched to, for example, "remaining 0".

In addition, the effect control device 300 maintains a state in which the second remaining pending display is not displayed on the second pending display section 630b. The number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 is
3”.

In (2) of FIG. 82, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold, and after (2) in FIG. 82, the second start memory (special figure 2 hold) is It is a display screen of the display device 41 when it occurs.

When the second remaining hold of the second start memory occurs, the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "4". At that time, since the pending display is not displayed in the second pending display unit 630b, so that it is easy to understand that the second start memory has occurred, the special figure 2 pending number display unit 6
A letter (eg, "new") may be displayed near 60 to indicate that the second starting memory has occurred.

(2) of FIG. 82 shows that the special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold, and the display device 41 when transitioning to the result screen 670 after (2) of FIG. is the display screen.

In the second half of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining reservation, the effect control device 300 displays the game result for a predetermined period on the display screen of the display device 41 Result screen 6
70 is displayed (result display). While the effect control device 300 displays the result screen 670, it maintains a state where the pending display of the second remaining pending is not displayed on the second pending display section 630b. Therefore, the display of the second remaining hold is no longer displayed on the display screen, and the result screen 670 is displayed in a large size instead, so that the player can easily visually recognize the result screen 670, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be done.

(Sa2) of FIG. 82 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation during the result display.

Along with the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the first second remaining hold, the effect is switched from the time saving generation remaining hold digest mode to the excessive hold digest mode (result mode). The result screen 670 is still displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

(2) in FIG. 82 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops variation. In addition, (2) to (2) in FIG. 83 are the display screens of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed based on the second to fourth second remaining reservations. is.

In this modification, for example, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the first second remaining hold stops fluctuation, the result mode is continued, and as shown in (2) of FIG. Display is maintained. In addition, in the fluctuation display area 615, the fluctuation of the small pattern stops, and the missing pattern (
For example, "267").

After that, the result mode is continued even when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the second to fourth second remaining reservations, and from (2) to (2) in FIG. As shown in
The display of the result screen 670 is maintained. At that time, the number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 decreases by one each time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, and finally the figure 83 (Part 2 ) becomes “0”.

Therefore, since the result mode is maintained until the second remaining hold is completely consumed, it is possible to secure a longer time for confirming the result screen 670, and the player does not panic about the result of the game. can be checked slowly. Also, since the result screen 670 can be displayed for a relatively long time, the effect control device 300 may display more detailed data such as the content of the effect on the result screen 670 .

(Ta 2) of FIG. 82 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the fourth second remaining reservation is stopped.

When the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining hold stops, the result mode ends, the effect is switched to the normal mode, and the result screen 670 is hidden. again,
In the variable display area 610 of the display screen, the winning symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, "41
6”) is displayed. Then, similarly to (da) of FIG. 80, a state in which the pending digestion area 640, the first pending display portion 630a, and the left-hand hitting display 671 are displayed. First pending display portion 630a
In, a hold display 633f corresponding to special figure 1 hold is displayed.

After that, in (chi 2) (tsu 2) of FIG. 82, as in (chi) (tsu) of FIG. , missing symbols (e.g. "5
21"), the fluctuation stops.

In addition, the timing at which the result screen 670 is hidden is not limited to the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the fourth second remaining hold stops fluctuation, but also at the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started. Alternatively, it may be the timing when both conditions are met.

[Screen transition example in modification 2 of special figure 2 pending display]
With reference to FIG. 84, the display mode at the time of result display will be described as the display mode of Modified Example 2 of the special figure 2 pending display.

FIG. 84 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in Modification 2 of the special figure 2 pending display.

Figure 84 (ke) shows that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold during the time saving generation remaining hold digestion mode. Starting memory (special figure 2 pending)
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when is generated, and is the same as (v) in FIG. When the second remaining hold of the second start memory occurs, the hold display 633e corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new").

(3) of FIG. 84 shows the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold, and transitions to the result screen 670 after (K) of FIG. display screen.

The special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining reservation, and in the latter half of the variation, the effect control device 300 performs result display.

At that time, in the modification 2 of the special figure 2 pending display, the effect control device 300 hides the variable display area 610 during the result display, while the second pending display section 630b and the pending digestion area 640
display. Therefore, the player can confirm the number of special figures 2 pending by visually checking the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 and the pending display of the second pending display unit 630b, and the special figure 2 pending is the second It is also possible to easily confirm that there is a remaining hold.

In addition, in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, similarly to (he) of FIG. 79, the variable display area 6
Since the result screen 670 is displayed in a large size instead of 10, the result screen 67
0 can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

(Sa3) in FIG. 84 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display in the result mode.

The display of the result screen 670 is maintained on the display screen of the display device 41, and at the top of the pending display 633b during fluctuation in the pending digestion area 640, there is a character "end" indicating the end of the time-saving generation residual pending digestion mode. is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that a series of effects by a plurality of special figure 2 variable display games based on the special figure 2 suspension during time saving and the first remaining suspension has ended.

In addition, the first second remaining hold is located in the holding digestion area 640 as a variable holding display 633b, and the holding displays 633c and 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold of the second holding display section 630b.
3d and 633e are also one position to the left. In addition, in the result mode (excessive hold digestion mode), the effect control device 300 omits the shift effect of the hold shift in accordance with the shortened variation (fixed variable time value) of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second remaining hold may be digested earlier. Also, the effect control device 300 may display which pending display is completed for the player in an easy-to-understand manner without omitting the shift effect of the pending shift.

(3) in FIG. 84 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the variation of the special figure variation display game based on the first second remaining reservation is stopped.

For example, in the modification 2 of the special figure 2 pending display, the result mode does not end even if the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining pending is stopped, and in FIG. As shown, the display of the result screen 670, the second pending display portion 630b, and the pending digestion area 640 is maintained.
In the variable display area 615, the small symbols (for example, "267") stop varying.

Then, in the result mode, the result screen 67 is displayed until the second remaining hold is completely consumed and the variable display area 610 and the first hold display portion 630a are displayed as shown in (T2) of FIG.
0, the display of the second pending display portion 630b and the pending digestion area 640 are also maintained. Therefore, the player can easily confirm which pending display has been completed until all of the second remaining pending is completed.

[Screen transition example in modification 3 of special figure 2 pending display]
With reference to FIG. 85, the display mode before the result display will be described as the display mode of Modified Example 3 of the special figure 2 pending display.

FIG. 85 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in Modification 3 of special figure 2 pending display.

(4) of FIG. 85 is the display device 41 when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the third first remaining hold during the time saving during the time saving remaining hold digestion mode after the end of the time saving is the display screen.

In (4) of FIG. 85, the hold display 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold of the second hold display portion 630b
3b, 633c, 633d are the same display mode as the hold display of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) (
For example, it is displayed as "O").

On the other hand, the hold display 633a corresponding to the first remaining hold has a predetermined display mode (for example, "▽")
, and a pedestal (for example, “□”) is displayed below the pending display 633a.

(4) and (4) in FIG. 85 are display screens of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation. In (4) of FIG. 85, a new second
A second remaining hold has occurred as a starting memory (special figure 2 hold). Similarly, in (4) and (4) of FIG. 85, hold displays 633b and 633c corresponding to the second remaining hold of the second hold display section 630b
, 633d, 633e are displayed in the same display mode (for example, "○") as the hold display of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold).

Therefore, the second remaining hold digested in the excessive hold digestion mode (result mode, special mode) is displayed in the same display mode as the hold display of the first starting memory digested in the normal mode that shifts immediately thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sense of incompatibility caused by the display modes of the second remaining hold and the hold display of the first start memory being different. In addition, the second remaining hold and the first
Since the suspended display of the start memory is displayed in a common display mode, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the performance during the variable display game, so that the player can easily concentrate on the performance and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

After that, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect to the result mode of the excessive pending consumption mode, and display the result screen 670 as shown in (he) of FIG. 79 (result display).

[Screen transition example in modifications 4 and 5 of special figure 2 pending display]
With reference to FIG. 86, the display mode after the result display will be described as the display modes of Modified Examples 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 reserved display.

FIG. 86 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in modifications 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 pending display.

FIG. 86 (sa) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display in the result mode,
It is the same as (sa) in FIG. After that, for example, in the display mode of modification 4 of special figure 2 pending display screen transitions as shown in FIG. 86 (5), in the display mode of modification 5 (6) in FIG.
Screen transitions like

(5) of FIG. 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 in the modification 4 of the special figure 2 suspension display when the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the first second remaining suspension is stopped. .

In (5) of FIG. 86, hold display 633c, 63 based on the second start memory (second remaining hold)
3d, 633e and a hold display 633f based on the first start memory are displayed in the common hold display section 630.
c.

The common hold display portion 630c is a hold display area common to the hold display based on the second start memory (second remaining hold) and the hold display based on the first start memory. That is, the common hold display section 630
c is a display portion including a first pending display portion 630a and a second pending display portion 630b.

Incidentally, the effect control device 300, so as to be easy to distinguish from the display mode of the hold display of the first start memory (for example, "○"), the hold display of the second remaining hold in a predetermined display mode (for example, "▽") can be displayed with

Therefore, by using the common hold display unit 630c and performing the hold display in a plurality of display modes in this way, the number and types of hold displays during waiting are easily understood, and the player can easily grasp the flow of the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

(Su5) of FIG. 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is thereafter executed based on the second second remaining reservation. From result mode to special mode (
exclusive mode), even if the production is switched to the production control device 300 similarly
30c can be displayed to collectively perform a hold display.

After that, similarly, after the special figure variation display game is executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the effect control device 300 makes a screen transition as shown in (ta) of FIG. 80, for example. It is possible to switch the effect from the special mode to the normal mode.

On the other hand, (6) in FIG. 86 is the display of the display device 41 in the modification 5 of the special figure 2 pending display when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining pending stops fluctuating. is the screen.

In (6) of FIG. 86, the first pending display portion 630 is divided into independent pending display areas.
a and the second pending display portion 630b are simultaneously displayed at the bottom of the display screen.

In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the display area of the second pending display portion 630b (for example, the square frame of the dashed line) so as to be easily distinguished from the display region of the first pending display portion 630a (for example, the square frame of the solid line). can do.

(S6) in FIG. 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second second reservation after that. According to the movement of the pending display, that is, according to the number of special figure 2 pending, the ratio of the first pending display portion 630a in the independent pending display area increases, and the ratio of the second pending display portion 630b becomes smaller. .

Therefore, by comparing the ratios of the first pending display portion 630a and the second pending display portion 630b in the independent pending display areas, the number of the second remaining pending pending states can be easily understood, and the player can play the game. Since it becomes easy to grasp the flow of the game, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

After that, similarly after the special figure variation display game is executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the effect control device 300, for example, similar to the fourth modification, (was) in FIG. The screen can be transitioned as shown in .

[Screen transition example in modification 6 of special figure 2 pending display]
Referring to FIG. 87, as a display mode of Modified Example 6 of special figure 2 pending display, a display mode of pending during digestion after result display will be described.

FIG. 87 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transition in modification 6 of special figure 2 pending display.

FIG. 87 (sa) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display in the result mode,
It is the same as (sa) in FIG. In addition, (d) in FIG. 87 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the first second remaining hold is stopped, and is the same as (d) in FIG. is.

When the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold is stopped by the losing pattern (for example, "267"), the effect control device 300 ends the result display and hides the result screen 670, A variable display area 610 in which the lost symbol is displayed is displayed.

(Su7) of FIG. 87 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed based on the second second remaining reservation.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed based on the second second remaining reservation, the reservation digestion area 640 without changing the position of the reservation display 633f of the first start memory of the first reservation display unit 630a
, the pending display 633c during change is displayed. The change pending display 633c is a change pending display based on the second second remaining hold.

Moreover, as shown in (S7) of FIG. 87, the effect control device 300 replaces the predetermined display mode (eg, "▽") with the same display mode as the hold display of the first start memory (eg, "O"). ) to display a pending change display 633c.

In this way, by displaying the pending display 633c during variation of the second remaining hold in the same display mode as the holding display of the first starting memory (for example, "O"), the second remaining holding and the first starting memory It is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity of the performance caused by the display mode of the suspension display during fluctuation of the display being different. In addition, since the second remaining hold and the variable hold display of the first start memory are displayed in a common display mode, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the performance during the variable display game, so that the player can concentrate on the performance. It becomes easier and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

After that, similarly after the special figure variation display game is executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the effect control device 300 makes a screen transition as shown in FIG. be able to.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is a game (variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game,
A game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a special figure 2 variable display game)), an effect control means (performance control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game, and a display means capable of displaying effects (Display device 41). In the gaming machine 10, the game control means can generate a specific game state (time saving state (time saving mode)) as a game state advantageous to the player, and the effect control means can change from the specific game state to the normal game state (normal mode). When transitioning to (transition state (excessive hold digestion mode)), a predetermined starting memory display (second 2 remaining pending display) is displayed in the specific display portion of the display means (starting memory display area (holding digestion area 640, first pending display portion 630a, second
It is not displayed in the pending display section 630b)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to provide a display mode that makes it easier for the player to grasp which of the pending states (series of effects) corresponding to the specific game state is to be executed until it is completed. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the game machine 10 is provided with start memory means (RAM 111c of the game control device 100) capable of storing start memories (first start memory, second start memory) as the right to execute the game. The effect control means is the starting memory generated in the specific game state (second starting memory digested during time saving,
A start memory display (for example, a rectangular frame (“□” display) serving as a base as a predetermined display mode) corresponding to the first remaining hold can be displayed on the specific display section.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, since the pending display is performed in a plurality of display modes, the number and types of the pending display are easy to understand and the player can easily grasp the flow of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means executes the first effect (excessive reservation digestion mode (result mode, special mode)) and the subsequent second effect (normal mode) after the end of the specific game state, 2 effect is executed in relation to the main game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the normal gaming state.

According to the gaming machine 10, the game based on the second starting memory is executed in a manner different from the game based on the first starting memory. It becomes easy for the player to understand whether there is. As a result, the player can have a higher sense of anticipation for the outcome of the game when the player is in an advantageous state, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means can switch the mode of effect when a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times) based on the start memory generated in the specific game state are completed (
For example, switching from time-saving mode to normal mode), and displaying the starting memory display according to the starting memory of the last game (for example, the 100th game) out of a predetermined number of games in a special manner (
For example, "LAST" is displayed on the lower pedestal).

According to such a gaming machine 10, even if the player does not pay attention to the display of the remaining number of times of the specific game state, the end timing of the specific game state can be recognized from the pending display, so that the flow of the game can be grasped. It becomes easy to play, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the specific display section includes a standby pending display area (first pending display section 630a, second pending display section 630b) for displaying a start memory display before execution of the game, and a start memory display area during execution of the game. At least one of the variable pending display areas (pending digest area 640) displaying the display.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the player visually recognizes at least one of the standby pending display area and the variable pending display area, the specific game state is supported until which hold (starting memory) is consumed. Since it is possible to grasp whether an effect (a series of effects) is to be executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means displays a special image (result screen 670), and even if the start memory of the main game in the specific game state occurs after the specific game state (second remaining hold), special The image is continuously displayed, and during the display of the special image, the execution time of the game is fixed without being selected by sorting (lottery).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the special image is continuously displayed until the starting memory (the second remaining hold), which is the main part in the specific game state, is completely consumed.
It becomes easy for the player to understand whether the game is based on the starting memory or the second starting memory, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means provides a predetermined starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (occurrence suspension during time saving, first remaining suspension) that occurs in the specific game state and the game is executed after the specific game state The mode indicating the number of games (the number of times the game is executed) until all the games based on the start memory are completed (notifying the player of the remaining number of times in the predetermined production mode) (eg, "x remaining")).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can easily grasp the timing at which the game ends based on the starting memory that occurs in the specific game state and the game is executed after the specific game state. can be improved.

In addition, in the game machine 10, a predetermined starting memory display (holding display of the second starting memory (for example, "▽")) is performed by the starting memory generated in the specific game state and the starting memory generated after the specific game state. is displayed in a different manner (presence or absence of a predetermined display manner (for example, a rectangular square “□” serving as a pedestal)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the player can easily identify the starting memory generated in the specific game state, an effect (a series of effects) corresponding to the specific game state is executed until any hold is completed. It becomes easy to grasp whether or not to play, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Also, in the following embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to a special figure variation display game after the end of a specific game state with general electric support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 88 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is similar to FIG. 54A, but a specific game state (omitted in FIGS. 54A and 54B) in the case of sudden time reduction due to ceiling time reduction and time reduction pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times is added. It differs from FIG. 54A in that the

The specific game state includes a specific game state A, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a time-saving (a time-saving) immediately after a big hit due to a big hit, and a time-saving state that occurs as a ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) not caused by a big hit. A specific game state B and a specific game state C, which is a time saving state that suddenly occurs as a time saving (c time saving) without being caused by a big hit, are included. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state is a time saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state (with general electric support / special figure high probability) in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

In the specific game states AC, the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but there is general electric support. In the specific game state AC, since the normal variable winning device 37 (universal electric) is likely to be released, it is recommended to hit the right hand aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 as the shooting mode of the game ball. for that reason,
In the specific game state, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is the special figure. 1 change display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, there are time saving modes #1 and #2 as in FIG. 54A.
In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving regarding time saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, three times) for simplicity, but may be a variable value as in the first embodiment (FIG. 55). The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance.

In addition, time saving mode # 3, # 4 is a production mode different from time saving mode # 1, # 2,
The performance modes are different, and the time-saving state (specific game state A) caused by the big hit and the time-saving state (specific game state B, C) not caused by the big win can be distinguished by the production. In addition, specific game state A
By making the performance mode the same in the specific game states B and C, it is possible to standardize the performance and reduce the development cost.

Also, in the specific game state A, if it is possible to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving mode # without changing time saving mode # 1, # 2 to time saving mode # 3, # 4 1 and #2 may be continued, and in this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that the specific game state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time reductions has increased). Of course, in the specific game state A, if it is possible to generate a time saving state due to a ceiling time saving or a sudden time saving, time saving mode # 1
, #2 may be changed to time-saving modes #3 and #4 to inform the player that the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and the transition state (normal game state that consumes the remaining hold) are the first embodiment (
The same as in FIG. 54A). The production mode of the transition state is described as one remaining holding digestion mode without dividing the mode before the end of the general electric opening and the mode after the end of the general electric opening, but it may be divided.

Next, transitions (transitions) from each game state, especially transitions to specific game states B and C and transitions from specific game states B and C will be described.

In the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the variable probability state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction ) and transition to the specific game state B (time saving mode #3). In addition, in the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit result (time saving result, time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving) and specific game state C (time saving mode#
4).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or if the support hit result occurs,
The time saving state may be continuously (overlapping) generated by ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, or may not be continuously generated. Basically, regardless of the number of times of the remaining time reduction in the specific game state A, transition to the specific game state B, C when the conditions to transition to the specific game state B, C (reaching the ceiling number of times and occurrence of support hit result) are established However, it may be changed whether or not to transition according to the number of remaining time saving. For example, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B (b number of times of time saving m3) is greater than the number of times of time saving remaining in the specific game state A (the number of times of time saving not yet consumed), from the specific game state A to the specific game state B transition to When the number of times of time saving in specific game state C (c number of times of time saving m4) is larger than the number of times of time saving remaining in specific game state A, transition from specific game state A to specific game state C is performed. If the number of time reductions (m3, m4) in the specific game states B and C is equal to or less than the number of time reductions remaining in the specific game state A, even if the time reduction pattern is displayed, the specific game states B and C do not occur and are specified. Game state A
It does not transition to the specific game state B, C from. In addition, the time saving pattern does not have to be displayed in the case of the ceiling time saving.

Basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C ends, it shifts to the remaining reservation digestion mode, but if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains, it is made to return to the specific game state A. good too. That is, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains even after the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B and C ends, the specific game state A continues from the specific game state B, C to the specific game state A It may return and not transition to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode).

Also, if the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or if the support hit result occurs,
Regardless of the relationship between the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C and the number of times of time saving remaining in the specific game state A, it is possible to have a configuration in which the time saving state due to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving does not occur at all. Even in this configuration, the specific game state A does not transition to the specific game states B and C even if the time saving pattern is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to generate (not overlap) a time saving state due to sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a support hit result (time saving pattern) during the specific game state A.
That is, even in the specific game state A, there is a case where the support hit result is won against the special figure 2 variable display game, but even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is possible not to suddenly generate a time saving state due to time saving (c time saving). preferred. In this case, the display device 41 or the lamp display device 80 may display a lost pattern as a decorative special pattern for presentation. Also, in the same way as described in FIG. 14 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, without providing a support hit result for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, even in the normal mode (normal game state), suddenly time saving (c It is preferable not to generate a time saving state due to time saving. Therefore, in the present embodiment, preferably, transition to the specific game state C (time saving mode #4) only from the transition state for digesting the remaining hold (remaining hold digestion mode). In this way, the value of the remaining pending consumption mode increases, and the player comes to expect the remaining pending consumption mode intensively, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 88, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state B, C or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving state is continued by the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (overlapping ) may be generated or may not be generated continuously. That is, the specific game state B, C
It is also possible to transition from to specific game states B and C.

When the transition condition is established from the specific game states B and C, the state transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) that digests the remaining hold. The transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game state A to the transition state. The transition conditions are (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of times of shortening time m3, m4 (first predetermined number of times, the initial value of the number of times of shortening time variation 2), and (ii) The second predetermined number of times (time Shortened fluctuation count 1
(initial value of ). In the present embodiment, the condition (iii) of the first embodiment (completion of opening the electric power for a predetermined number of times) is not provided because it is not necessary. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the number of times of working hours reduction.

It should be noted that the number m1-m4 of time-saving modes #1-#4 and the number of ceiling times m5 can be appropriately adjusted to change the game characteristics.

For example, m1 (
a Time saving number 1) < m4 (c time saving number) < m2 (a time saving number 2) < m5 (ceiling number) < m3
You may adjust so that the relationship of (b number of times of time saving) may be satisfied.

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m4 Adjustment may be made so as to satisfy the relationship of (c times of time reduction) < m5 (ceiling times) < m3 (b times of time reduction).

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m4 (c time saving number of times) < m3 (b time saving number of times) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times) can be adjusted to satisfy

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 89 is a table showing, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining pending number (prescribed remaining pending number) corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit in the special figure variation display game. The pattern is a pattern for a big hit (including a V prize after a small win), and here it is determined by a big hit pattern random number, and time-saving patterns are excluded.

This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment, except that the number of time reductions is different for the big hit symbol A of the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbol G of the jackpot (jackpot with remaining pending) in the special figure 2 variable display game in the state without the general electric support is the same as in the first embodiment. Regarding the jackpot (including the V prize in the small hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game with the general electric support, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, so there is only one type of pattern S .

In the normal game state (normal mode), the big hit (symbol A
) occurs, after the jackpot state ends, the game moves to a specific game state A (time saving mode #1).
In the specific game state A, when a big win (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, and the number of prescribed remaining reservations is fixed to 4 pieces.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal electric motion in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 90(A), there is only one winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per general pattern is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, low probability (low probability general pattern) and high probability (high probability general pattern) probability) is not controlled to vary between Note that, as in the first embodiment,
A low probability lower than 250/251 may be set in the normal game state.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum number of counts of electric power (
count number upper limit) is 10.

The normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is a constant value of 500 msec. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 may be set to a value longer than 500 msec in the normal game state. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Although not shown in FIG. 90, the total FZ3 of the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal ending time may be, for example, 700 msec equal to or longer than the normal electric fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal electric stop time FZ2.

As shown in FIG. 90(B), the normal variable prize winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened only once for one hit of the normal pattern variable display game, and enters the winning easy state. However, the normal power release time is short (for example, 48 msec) in a state without power support such as a normal game state, and a long time (eg, 3400 msec) in a state with power support such as a short working time state. The normal/universal power release pattern (normal/universal power release mode) differs depending on the game state. As described above, the probability of winning a general pattern is always a constant value regardless of the game state, so in the present embodiment, the easy winning state of the general electricity support has a longer general electricity open time than the case without the general electricity support. It is realized by

In addition, the general electric open time may be shorter than the general electric power fluctuation time FZ1, the general electric power stop time FZ2, the general electric power remaining ball processing time and the general electric power ending time total FZ3 in the state without the electric power support. , the time FZ1-F
It may be longer than Z3.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 91 shows transition state from time saving state as specific game state (may be included in normal game state)
It is a timing chart showing a game state, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), a general figure state, a general electric condition, a special figure 2 reservation number, etc. In addition, in FIG. 91, for the sake of simplification, the timing of the end of the time saving and the start timing of the mains disconnection are aligned, but they may be shifted.

Fig. 91 (A) shows time saving mode # 1 of specific game state A (first specific game state) following the big hit
, #2 are completed and transition to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode). In the case of FIG. 91 (A), the stop display time STP1 (first period ) is set longer than the long-term general electric open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) for general electric support. That is, the relationship STP1>OPN is set.

In addition, the game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit (A4804), but in this embodiment,
Furthermore, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is set corresponding to the type of time saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to the time saving mode #1, #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final fluctuation is set longer than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. .

In addition, in FIG. 91, the time saving final variation will be described as a variation in which the number of times of special figure 2 variation after the end of the big hit will be the number of times of time saving (three times). However, the time saving final variation may be a special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation display game), and the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) It may be the above-mentioned second predetermined number of times.

Assuming that the special figure 2 reservation number is the maximum value of 4 before the start of the time saving final fluctuation, the special figure 2 reservation number decreases by 1 to 3 at the time saving final fluctuation of the special figure 2, but the normal fluctuation winning device When the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 due to the opening of the general electric power of 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, depending on the hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure fluctuation) started at this time, even in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end becomes open.

Hypothetically, if the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts during the long-time electric power open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving ends, the special figure 2 hold number will decrease by 1. It becomes 3, and here, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again, which is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are digested after the time saving state ends. Remaining pending number is 5 (1 + 4)
become. In addition, the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 2 while the general electricity is open in the remaining hold digestion mode
If so, it is possible that the remaining pending count will be 6 (greater than 5).

Specific game state A (time saving mode # 1, # 2) passes through the jackpot state, so
The player's benefits and game value are large in terms of the number of acquired balls). Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of remaining reservations does not exceed the specified number of remaining reservations of four and does not become five or more so as not to excessively give a privilege or game value to the player. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation in the specific gaming state A is set to be longer than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and the remaining during the general electricity open time OPN The pending digestion (execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is prevented from being started (STP1>OPN). As a result, the number of remaining holds is 4
can be held individually.

In addition, the normal open time (for example, 48 msec) caused by the hit result of the normal map fluctuation in the remaining hold digestion mode is the normal open time OPN ( For example, compared to 3400 msec), it is a considerably short time. For this reason, in the short-time normal power release in the remaining hold digestion mode (the normal power release after the normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), the special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) does not accumulate and the number of remaining holds increases. not because
The number of remaining reservations is 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining reservations.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, the stricter condition STP1
> (OPN + FZ2) relationship, or STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN) relationship can also be set, but the general pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the general pattern stop time FZ2 are the general pattern open time OPN
Therefore, by setting the relationship STP1>OPN, the effect of keeping the number of remaining reservations at 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining reservations, is sufficiently obtained.

On the other hand, FIG. 91 (B) shows specific game states B and C (time saving state,
2nd specific game state) time saving mode #3, #4 shows the situation where it changes to transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) ends. In the case of FIG. 91 (B), the stop display time STP2 (second period ) is changed to a long-term power open time OPN (3rd period,
for example, 3400 msec). That is, the relationship STP2<OPN is set.
Corresponding to time saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final fluctuation is set shorter than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. (A4804).

For this reason, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts while the electric power is open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving mode # 3 and # 4 are finished, the number of special figure 2 holds is reduced by 1 to 3. When the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 during this general electric open, special figure 2
The number of reservations becomes 4 again, and the number of remaining reservations, which is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) digested after the time saving state ends, becomes 5 (1 piece + 4 pieces). In addition, if the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed twice while the general electricity is open in the remaining reservation digestion mode, the remaining number of reservations will be 6 (larger than 5).

Specific game states B and C (time saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through the jackpot state,
The player's benefits and gaming value in terms of the number of balls released (the number of balls obtained) are small. Therefore, in this embodiment,
To increase the possibility that the number of remaining reservations exceeds four of the prescribed remaining number of reservations and becomes five or more so as to give a player greater benefits and game value. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP2 of the short time final variation of the specific game states B and C is set shorter than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and during the general electricity open time OPN Digestion of remaining pending (execution of special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
is easily started (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, the long electricity opening with the electricity opening time OPN does not occur in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end,
This long electric power opening will be brought forward and some will be opened before the end of the short working hours. In this case
Even if the relationship of STP2<OPN is set, the number of remaining holds remains at 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining holds, and 5
It may not be more than one.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, a looser condition STP2 <
It is possible to set the relationship of (OPN + FZ2) or the relationship of STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but the range of STP2 values is narrower. It definitely increases the chances of more.

Note that in the present embodiment, STP2 (second period)<OPN (third period)<STP1 (
1st period) is established, and the relationship of STP2<STP1 is established regardless of the length of the general power supply open time OPN. In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the time saving final variation in the specific game state A (time saving mode # 1, # 2) is changed to the specific game state B, C (time saving mode # 3,
#4) to be longer than the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final variation. Here, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is the same as the time from the end of the final special figure variation display game in the specific game state to the start of the next special figure variation display game when there is a remaining hold.

Even if the relationship STP2<STP1 is established regardless of the open time OPN,
Since the start of the remaining hold fluctuation after the time saving of the specific game states B and C ends earlier than in the case of the specific game state A, the number of remaining holds can be larger than the specific game state A for the specific game states B and C You can enhance your sexuality. For this reason, the difference (difference in privilege and game value) between the specific game state A in which a large number of balls are paid out through the big win state and the specific game states B and C in which small balls are paid out without going through the big win state is alleviated. can be done. Therefore, even in specific game states B and C (time saving mode #3, #4) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, such as specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) following a big hit, Benefits and game values are compensated, and interest in games increases.

In addition, when the conditions for generating the specific game state B and C are established during the specific game state A, that is, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving final fluctuation is not STP1 (first period), but STP2 which is smaller than STP1
(Second period) may be set. In this case, from the specific game state A after the big hit, the time reduction state (specific game state B, C) due to the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (specific game state B, C) can be continuously (overlapped) generated.
Set the stop display time of the time saving final fluctuation to a short time STP2, and a series of time saving state after the big hit (
After the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C), after the time-saving final variation, a small STP2 (second period) benefit and game value can be further given to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that, basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C that continue to the specific game state A ends, the system shifts to the remaining reserved consumption mode, and the time saving final fluctuations are the fluctuations in the specific game states B and C. When specific game states B and C occur from specific game state A, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2 areas are overwritten to the time reduction count (initial value of time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2) of specific game state B and C This is because the number of remaining time reductions in the specific game state A disappears. However, even if the number of time reductions in the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A is completed, the remaining number of time reductions in the specific game state A is copied to another predetermined area and remains without disappearing. In the case of , it is not necessary to return to the specific game state A from the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A, and not to shift to the transition state (residual hold digestion mode). In this case, the time saving final variation is the variation in the specific game state A. The remaining number of time reductions is smaller than the initial value of the time reduction variation number 2 for the specific game state A and greater than zero.

In addition, even if the time saving pattern (sapo hit result) that can cause the specific game state B and C is stopped and displayed during the specific game state A, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is set to STP1, which is larger than STP2, instead of STP2. can be set. Even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, in the case of a configuration (preferred configuration) that does not continuously generate the time saving state by the time saving pattern from the specific game state A, the long first period (STP1) By holding the number of remaining reservations to be consumed after the specific game state A at the specified remaining number of reservations, it is possible to prevent the specific game state A following a big win from becoming too advantageous. In addition, even in the case of such a configuration as to continuously generate the time-saving state by the time-saving pattern from the specific game state A, since the specific game state B, C passes through the specific game state A following the big hit, the specific game It is possible to prevent states B and C from becoming too advantageous.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a special figure variation display game), and when the result of the game is a special result, the player An advantageous special game state (for example, a jackpot state) can be generated. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A) that is advantageous to the player following the special game state following the generation of the special game state, and generates the special game state. It is possible to generate a second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) that is advantageous to the player.
The game control means provides a first
The period (for example, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation) is the second period from the end of the final game in the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time S of the time saving final variation
Make it larger than TP2).

In such a gaming machine 10, since the second period is shorter than the first period, after the end of the second specific game state, the starting memory (residual hold) accumulated to the maximum in the second specific game state is consumed quickly, and this It is possible to store extra starting memory (residual hold) by the amount. For this reason, the first specific game state (for example, specific game state A) in which the profit of the special game state (for example, ball output) can be obtained via the special game state, and the profit of the special game state without passing through the special game state ( For example, the difference in profit between the second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) in which no balls are obtained can be alleviated. Therefore, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, the profit is compensated and the interest in the game increases.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is convertible between an easy-win state and an easy-non-win state, and the first specific game state and the second specific game state are easier to convert to the easy-win state than the normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided. A third period (for example, open-circuit time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy winning state is shorter than the first period (STP1) and longer than the second period (STP2). Therefore, it is possible to hold the number of remaining reservations digested after the end of the first specific game state (for example specific game state A) to the specified number of remaining reservations, and second specific game state (for example specific game states B, C) It is possible to increase the possibility that the number of remaining reservations that will be consumed after the end of will exceed the prescribed number of remaining reservations. As a result, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, profits are ensured and the interest in the game increases.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, game control means (for example, the game control device 100)
is the first period (
STP1) can be set, and the period from the end of the final game in the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period (STP2). The game control means, when the condition for generating the second specific game state is established during the first specific game state (for example, when the ceiling number of times is reached or when the support hit result occurs), the first specific game state Alternatively, the period from the end of the final game in the specific game state as the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set not to the first period but to a second period shorter than the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of game states including the special game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, a small second period (STP2) of special benefits and game values are further given, It can improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, game control means (for example, the game control device 100)
can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific gaming state to the start of the next game as the first period, and the period from the end of the final game in the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period. The game control means, during the first specific game state, even if the result of the game that can cause the second specific game state (for example, time-saving pattern, support hit result) is displayed, the first
The period from the end of the final game of the specific game state as the specific game state or the second specific game state to the start of the next game is not the second period, but the first period (STP1) longer than the second period (STP2) ).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of the game that can generate the second specific game state is displayed, the second specific game state is not continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state. In the case of , the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific game state following the special game state from becoming too advantageous. Also, even in the case of a configuration in which the second specific game state is continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state, the second specific game state passes through the first specific game state following the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second specific game state from becoming too advantageous.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the remaining hold display (starting memory display) on the display screen.

[Example of screen transition]
92A and 92B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the fourth embodiment.

In (ha), in the time saving state, a mode display 679 corresponding to the time saving mode as the production mode is displayed. Here, although working hours mode #2 is illustrated as working hours mode, working hours mode is not restricted to working hours mode #2. "Flower mode" is displayed as the mode display 679 corresponding to the time saving mode. As a background corresponding to the display contents of the mode display 679, image 6
A background image is displayed in which the moon as 88 (here a full moon) illuminates a flowered tree as image 687 . The tree image 687 includes flowers as characters.

In (C), as the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) as identification information is being executed in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and as the identification information The variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration reduced pattern (small pattern) is displayed in the variation display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen.
is running on Left region 610A, right region 610B, middle region 610 of variable display region 610
C, respectively, left design (decorative design A), right design (decorative design B), middle design (decorative design C)
is fluctuating.

Also, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game since the end of the previous big hit is displayed by the number of variations display 677 . Here, the variation number display 677 is "95G", indicating that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 95. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not the execution count of the special figure variation display game is close to the ceiling count. Support hit (time reduction hit)
is displayed by the continuation count display 680 . Here, the continuous count display 6
80 is "sixth day", indicating that the number of times of continuation is six. The number of continuous support hits may be the number of support hits continuously generated without a big win (including a big win by V winning after a small win). The number of continuous support wins is cleared to zero by the occurrence of a big win.

Four pending displays 683a (second pending displays) are displayed in the second pending display portion 630b (waiting area) that displays the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the second pending display. be done. The pending display 683 a has a display mode (first display mode) corresponding to the flower character in the tree image 687 . In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, a variable pending display 683b indicating the variable pending related to the special figure variable display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) is displayed. there is Note that the reserved digestion area 640 may be indicated by a rectangular frame or platform. In addition, the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) before executing the variable display game
is displayed as the first suspension display (first start memory display), nothing is displayed here.

In the special figure 1 reserved number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen, the number "0" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "4" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number respectively ” is displayed. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variation display game being executed (fluctuation). The symbol "○" indicates that A fourth symbol variation may be performed as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) by blinking the symbol "○".

Next, in (H), a special figure 2 variation display game is being executed after two games from (H). The change number display 677 is "97G". The pending display 683a of the second pending display portion 630b is (
C) has been moved twice (holding shift) toward the holding digestion area 640, but there are two special figure 2 holdings that are remaining holdings, and the second holding display section 630b corresponds to the remaining holdings. Two pending displays 683c (o, second display mode) are newly displayed. The pending display 683c (o) is in a different mode (second display mode) from the pending display 683a having the flower character mode (first display mode). As a result, the player can recognize the pending display 683c corresponding to the remaining pending that is digested after the end of the time saving state, distinguishing it from the pending display 683a that is digested during the time saving state, and easily grasps the number of remaining pending. It can be recognized that the end of the time saving state is approaching.

Next, in (F), a special figure 2 variable display game is being executed after two games from (H). The variation number display 677 is "99G", and it becomes the time saving final variation which is the final special figure variation display game in the time saving state. In addition, 2
are newly occurring. When the time-saving final variation ends, the time-saving mode also ends.

Next, in (to), after the end of the time saving mode, the transition to the remaining hold digestion mode (normal game state to digest the remaining hold), digestion of the first remaining hold, that is, special figure 2 fluctuation related to the first remaining hold A display game is started. "Month mode" is displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the remaining pending consumption mode. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, 4 pending displays 6 corresponding to the 4 remaining pending
83c is moved to the left (reserved shift) towards the reserved digestion region 640. FIG. According to the variation number display 677, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game since the end of the previous big hit is "100G".
is displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, the number "4
” is displayed, it may be changed to “3” at this point.

In (H), as a special figure 2 variable display game, the variation of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen, but unlike (C)-(F), the display At the center of the screen, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is not displayed. Decorative special design (large design)
may not be performed, or may be hidden by the background image in layers behind the background image. In the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, the number "3" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed.

In the center of the display screen, a moon image 690 is displayed larger than the (c)-(f) moon image 688 instead of the variation of the decorative special symbol (large symbol). A lit half-moon (semicircle) is displayed as the moon image 690, but the rest of the moon that does not shine is also dimly displayed (dotted line) so as not to stand out. As a result, the circular outline of the entire moon as an overall image is displayed so that it can be slightly recognized. The pending display 683c and the pending display 683b corresponding to the remaining pending are displayed in a circular form (o form, second display form) corresponding to the circular outline of the entire month.

Next, in (e), the operation effect is started, and as a pre-operation effect, an operation prompting display "push", which is a character display, is superimposed on the change pending display 683b and displayed in front of the change pending display 683b. be. Note that the operation effect includes a pre-operation effect (operation request sound and operation prompt display) prompting the player to operate the effect button 25 (operation means), and/or a post-operation corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25. Production (operation corresponding production) is included. Further, the operation prompting display “push” may be superimposed on the image 690 and displayed on the front side of the image 690 in the center of the display screen. The operation prompting display may be another character display "PUSH", or may be a display of an image simulating the effect button 25. FIG.

Next, in (M), since the effect button 25 has been operated (depressed operation in this case), a glowing circular full moon is displayed as the moon image 690 as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25. The effect is such that the remaining part of the moon that does not shine (e) shines.

Next, in (mi), the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed as part of the operation corresponding production. The production of (E) is a production with a high degree of expectation for a reduction in working hours (per support), and in (MI), the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a reduction in working hours. Then, in the variable display area 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen, the decorative time-saving pattern "113" is stopped and displayed, and at the center of the display screen, a blessing effect display 691 such as the characters "Congratulations on the time-saving win!" increases. It should be noted that the blessing effect display 691 does not have to be executed so as to surprise the player by suddenly rushing into time saving. In this case as well, the interest in the game increases.

Next, in (M), the time-saving mode corresponding to the specific game state C is entered, and "flower mode" is displayed as the mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode. The time-saving mode here is time-saving mode # 4, which is different from (C)-(F) time-saving mode # 2, so another name (for example, "Sakura mode") is displayed as mode display 679. good too. The number of continuation display 680 is "7
day", indicating that the number of continuous support hits (time reduction hits) has increased by 1 to 7 times.

In (M), similar to (C), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is also executed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the variation of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) (↓ ↓↓) is executed in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen. The number-of-variations display 677 is "101G", indicating that the number of executions of the special-figure variation display game since the end of the previous big hit is 101.

Suspension displays 683 a and 683 b are suspension displays that have changed in form from (mi), and have a display mode (first display mode) corresponding to the flower character in the tree image 687 . In the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed. In addition, a right-hand hitting instruction display 693 is displayed to prompt the player to hit right, and winning to the normal variable prize-winning device 37 opened by hitting right can occur. As in the third embodiment, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a sudden time saving (c time saving) occurs only in the case of the remaining hold (special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state), but in the case of this preferred configuration , a suspended display 683a returned to the display mode corresponding to the flower character,
683b (money balance pending) does not suddenly reduce working hours. Therefore, the player can easily recognize whether or not it is possible to suddenly expect a reduction in working hours in the form of the pending display (the first display form or the second display form).

Next, in (Me), winning to the normal variable winning device 37 opened in the time saving mode occurs twice, and the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 shows the special figure 2 reservation number "4" is displayed.
In addition, four pending displays 683a (second pending displays) are displayed in the second pending display portion 630b (standby area).

As described above, in FIG. 92A and FIG. 92B, the pending display 683c displayed corresponding to the remaining pending is the same aspect (◯) in both the time saving mode and the remaining pending digestion mode, but may be different.
For example, (H) (F), hold display 68 displayed corresponding to the remaining hold in the time saving mode
3c may be displayed like a rhombus (◇, third display mode) to be different from the pending display 683c (o, second display mode) displayed corresponding to the remaining pending in the remaining pending digestion mode. Even in this way, the player can display the pending display 683c
can be recognized separately from the pending display 683a that is digested during the time saving state, making it easier to grasp the remaining number of pending calls and recognizing that the time saving state is about to end.

In addition, if the second to fourth remaining holds instead of the first remaining hold become a hit result (big hit, small hit, short time hit), during a long-term special figure fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold that will be a hit , and the special figure variation display game related to the remaining hold of the losing result until it becomes a hit may be executed in a short time.

[Another example of screen transition]
FIG. 93 is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the fourth embodiment. FIG. 93 is an example of a case where the special figure variation display game related to the remaining hold in (e) of FIG. 92A is all out including the unexecuted part. In addition, the effect control device 300 can acquire the result of the special figure variation display game related to the unexecuted remaining reservation from the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command). In the example of FIG. 92A, the special figure variation display game related to the first remaining hold was the time saving hit result.

In (mi-1), the effect button 25 is operated after (e), but the aspect of the moon image 690 does not change from (e) in response to the result of the remaining hold being lost. And the missing pattern "7
24” is stopped and displayed.

Next, in (M2), the display device 41 becomes a result screen 692 showing the game result, and the number of game balls obtained and the like are displayed. Note that the result screen 692 may be the same as the result screen 670 of the second embodiment. On the result screen 692, the mode display 679 may be erased and hidden so as not to be an obstacle.

Here, the special figure variation display game related to the second remaining reservation is executed only in the variation display area 615, and the deviation result is stopped after that. In the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations reduced by one is displayed. The change number display 677 increases by one and "
101G" is displayed.

Next, in (Mi3), the result screen 692 continues, the special figure variation display game relating to the third remaining hold is executed only in the variation display area 615, and then the deviation result is stopped and displayed.
In the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, the number "1" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations reduced by one is displayed. The change number display 677 is increased by one and displayed as "102G".

Next, in (Mi 4), the result screen 692 continues, the special figure variation display game relating to the fourth and last remaining hold is executed only in the variation display area 615, and then the deviation result is stopped and displayed. . In the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, the number "0" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations reduced by one is displayed. The change number display 677 is increased by one and displayed as "103G".

In the above (Mi 2) to (Mi 4), the variation time of the special figure variation display game related to the second to fourth remaining reservations may be shorter than the variation time during the time saving state. As a result, the unsuccessful remaining hold is consumed in a short time, so that the player is not irritated. Further, since it is sufficient for the player to see the result screen 692 only once, the result screen 692 will not be displayed for a long time.

Next, in (Y), the remaining pending digestion mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered. "Normal mode" is displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode. In addition, a left-handed hitting instruction display 694 is provided to urge the player to hit left-handed, and winning to the starting prize-winning port 36 can occur by hitting left-handed. It should be noted that the number of continuation display 680 remains "6th day", and the number of continuations per support is 6.
However, the number of continuous support hits may be cleared to zero not only by the big win but also by the occurrence of the normal mode. In this case, the number of continuations of the support hit is the big hit (
(including big hits by V prizes after small hits) and the number of support hits that occurred consecutively without going through the normal mode. In addition, the continuous number display 6 corresponding to the continuous number of times per support (number of consecutive chances)
80 may be hidden.

Then, a prize to the starting prize winning port 36 actually occurs, and as a decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special pattern (large pattern) is executed in the fluctuation display area 610 in the center of the display screen. , and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is displayed in the variation display area 6 at the lower right corner of the display screen.
15 is running. The change number display 677 is increased by one and displayed as "104G".
The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "
○”, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “×” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped.

In the pending execution area 640, a variable pending display 683b indicating variable pending related to the special figure variable display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) is displayed. In addition, since the variable pending display 683b here is related to the special figure 1 variable display game, the variable pending display 683b related to the special figure 2 variable display game (Fig. 92A (ha) (
F), etc.) is displayed in a triangle with a different aspect (form).

Next, in (Yu), one first start memory (special figure 1 hold) is generated in the first hold display unit 630a, and the corresponding hold display 682a (first hold display) is the first hold One is displayed on the display unit 630a. Also, in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650, the number "1" indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations
is displayed.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has been described, but when all the time-saving final fluctuations and the remaining pending fluctuations result in a loss, the operation-promoting display and the operation-response production corresponding to the loss result are executed with the time-saving final fluctuation. The result screen may be displayed from the variation of the remaining hold next to the final variation of the time saving, and the remaining hold may be digested in a short time by making the variation related to the remaining hold shorter than the variation during the time saving. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the case of the time saving state as the specific game state (time saving mode as the production mode) has been described, but the specific game state is a probability change state with general electric support (probability change mode as the production mode) It's okay.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a special figure variation display game), and effect control means (for example, Effect control device 300). The game machine 10 includes a start memory means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as a right to execute the game. The effect control means performs display control of the starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. The effect control means sets the display mode of the starting memory display to the first display mode (for example, a flower character) for the starting memory of the game executed in the first game state (for example, the time saving state, the variable probability state), and the second display mode. A second display mode (for example, ◯) is set for the start memory of the game executed in the game state (for example, the normal game state (transition state) in which the remaining hold is consumed). In the first game state, if a starting memory for a game to be executed in the second gaming state occurs, the starting memory is displayed in a second display mode (such as ◯) or a third display mode (such as ◇). .

In such a gaming machine 10, the player has a starting memory (for example, remaining hold) that is digested in the second game state (for example, normal game state) after the end of the first game state (for example, time saving state, variable probability state) The corresponding starting memory display (eg pending display 683c) can be discriminated from the starting memory display (eg pending display 683a) of the starting memory consumed during the first gaming state. Therefore, the first
Before the start of the second game state next to the game state, it becomes easy to grasp the number of starting memories (for example, the number of remaining reservations) that are consumed in the second game state, and it is possible to recognize that the end of the first game state is near. . Therefore, it is possible to store the starting memory to be digested in the next second game state without forgetting, and to prevent the decline in interest in the game.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol).

[Display Mode of Lamp Display Device 80]
FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a lamp display device 80 in relation to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 94, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display units 1, 3, and 4 for the special figure 1 arranged in a straight line, the lamp display unit 2 for the special figure 2 arranged in a straight line, 5 and 6 are arranged in parallel.

As shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 94, the lamp display device 80 performs a variable display (circular lighting) that repeats green lighting, red lighting, and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle (cyclic lighting cycle) as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern). Possible lamp display units 1, 2 (full color LED) and lamp display unit 3-6 (here, single color LED) for notifying the start memory number (number of reservations) of each special figure fluctuation display game. The predetermined cycle is set to 300 msec or 400 msec, for example. Also, the lamp display section 3-6
may be a full-color LED, but for example, R (
red) are used. That is, it can be used by connecting the conductive wire of one terminal (R) out of the three RGB terminals of the full-color LED.

The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 . For this reason, while the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp display device The fluctuation time of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of 80 is measured by the production control device 300. FIG.

In the upper diagram of FIG. 94, the lamp display section 1 is arranged above the lamp display sections 3 and 4, and the lamp display section 2 is arranged above the lamp display sections 5 and 6. In FIG. Note that the arrangement is not limited to this, and for example, the lamp display section 1 may be arranged below the lamp display sections 3 and 4, and the vertical positions may be reversed.
Moreover, similarly, the lamp display section 2 may be arranged below the lamp display sections 5 and 6 .

Between the lamp display portion 3 and the lamp display portion 4, a connecting portion 81a is provided as a decorative portion. The connecting part 81a has, for example, a raised part (ridge part) and a recessed part (groove part) formed linearly, and the lamp display parts 3 and 4 jointly indicating the number of special figures 1 reserved are set. The ridge portion and the groove portion can make it easier for the player to recognize that the ridge portion and the groove portion are in contact with each other. Similarly, between the lamp display part 5 and the lamp display part 6, it is made easy for the player to recognize that the lamp display parts 5 and 6 jointly indicating the number of special figures 2 reserved are set. A connecting portion 81b is provided. Note that the connection portions 81a and 81b may be in a manner that allows the player to easily recognize that the lamp display portions 3 and 4 and the lamp display portions 5 and 6 are a set. It may be formed as a linear shape. Also, the connecting portions 81a and 81b may be formed as a square frame, an elliptical frame, or the like so as to partition the lamp display portions 3 and 4 and the lamp display portions 5 and 6, respectively. Also, by changing the color inside and outside the frame such as the square frame or ellipse, the partitioned area may be made easier to understand.

FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the fourth pattern on the lamp display sections 1 and 2, and FIG.
is a diagram for explaining the display of the special figure 1 reserved number or the special figure 2 reserved number in the lamp display unit 3-6.

As in the example (example 1) of (A) in FIG. 95, the lamp display units 1 and 2 when the fourth symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (during special figure fluctuation) are extinguished → green lit → red lit → extinguished → Lit green → Lit red →
In order of extinguishing . In this case, the cyclical lighting cycle (duration of one cycle of light off→green light→red light→light off) is 300 msec. As described above, the lamp display portions 1 and 2 are alternately switched to green and red, so that the player can easily recognize that the fourth symbol is being variably displayed.

In addition, as in another example (example 2) of FIG. 95A, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 when the fourth pattern is displayed in a variable manner are extinguished → green lit → extinguished → red lit → extinguished → For example, a variable display may be performed in which the mode of the fourth symbol changes every 100 msec in the order of green lighting→lighting out→red lighting→lighting out. Cyclic lighting cycle in this case (light off → green light → light off → red light → light off 1
cycle time) becomes 400 msec. In this way, when the lamp display parts 1 and 2 are alternately switched to green and red, by intervening the lights out, it is possible to avoid that the green and red colors are superimposed on each other due to an afterimage or the like, which is seen by the player, and the visibility is improved. can be enhanced.

Further, as in another example (example 3) in FIG. 95(A), variable display is performed using an intermediate color (for example, purple (R+B), mixed color) displayed by combining each element of the full-color LED. can also Specifically, when the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off → lit in green → lit in red → lit in purple → lit in green → lit in red → lit in purple → lit in green . In this order, for example, a variable display can be performed in which the mode of the fourth pattern changes every 100 msec. In this case, the cyclic lighting cycle (duration of one cycle of light off→green light→red light→purple light→light off) is 400 msec. In this way, by including not only green and red but also another color (for example, purple) that does not result in a stop in the cyclic lighting mode when the lamp display units 1 and 2 are switched, the variable display mode can be emphasized and made more intelligible. It is possible to easily notify the player of the variable display.

On the other hand, as will be described later in Example 1 of FIG. 95(B), when displaying the stop result of the fourth symbol, the lamp display sections 1 and 2 do not use an intermediate color such as purple, and each element (Red (R), Green (G)
, blue (B)) and off only. In this way, the lamp display units 1 and 2
By not using a neutral color for the stop result of the fourth pattern in , it is possible to avoid troubles when some elements become unusable due to breakage or the like. For example, when the results other than the winning result should be displayed in intermediate color purple (R+B), if some elements (blue (B)) are unusable (broken) and the winning result (red R) is displayed, trouble will occur. However, if a neutral color is not used and if some elements are unusable (damage), a misalignment (lights out) is displayed and a big win is actually achieved, the result is more advantageous than the display mode for the player and causes trouble. hard to be

In addition, in example 2 of FIG. 95(A), purple (R+B) is displayed in example 3 by interposing the extinguishment.
, the switching cycle becomes longer, but the same cyclic lighting cycle as in Example 1 (300 m
sec), for example, a variable display may be performed in which the mode of the fourth symbol changes every 75 msec. Thus, the cyclic lighting cycle and the switching timing (the timing at which the mode changes) in the variable display of the fourth symbol on the lamp display portions 1 and 2 make it easy for the player to recognize that the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It can be set as appropriate.

In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, also in this embodiment, similarly to the big hit determination process of FIG. 16A, by lottery using the big hit random number, small hit determination and time reduction determination are also performed (Fig. 1
Small hit determination process of 6B, support hit determination process of FIG. 16C). In time saving determination as a lottery, time saving is set as a determination result when the big hit random number matches the time saving decision value. The time reduction judgment value is
It is different from the small hit determination value and the big hit determination value. In the case of the time saving determination result (time saving result), in the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) or the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503), the time saving design (stop design number, stop design pattern) as a stop design ( A time-saving design number, a time-saving design pattern) are set, and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the time-saving design is transmitted to the production control device 300.例文帳に追加Then, in the display device 41, the decoration stop pattern (for example, "1, 1, 3", "1, 2, 3", "1, 3, 1") is displayed by the effect control device 300, and the time saving pattern is displayed next time. Enter the time saving state from the special figure fluctuation display game.

As in example 1 of FIG. 95 (B), when the fluctuation display of the 4th symbol stops (variation stop, special figure stop), the lamp display unit 1 (4th symbol LED for special figure 1) displays the 4th symbol As, when the result (special figure stop result) of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is lost, it turns off, and in the case of a big hit result or a small hit result, it emits light in red (R). Thus, the lamp display unit 1 of the present embodiment is turned off or emits red light when the special figure is stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the result of the special figure 1 variable display game from becoming a time saving pattern, the time saving judgment value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set to no or outside the range of the jackpot random number, The lamp display part 1 does not emit light in green (time saving pattern). In addition, by not executing (skipping (omitted)) the support hit determination process, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may be prevented from becoming a time saving symbol.

On the other hand, the lamp display unit 2 (4th symbol LED for special figure 2) is turned off when the result of the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is lost as the 4th symbol, and the result of the big hit or Light is emitted in red (R) in the case of a small hit result, and further in green (G) in the case of a time-saving pattern.
Thus, the lamp display unit 2 of the present embodiment can be turned off, red or green when the special figure is stopped. In addition, the lamp display unit 2 of the present embodiment notifies a special result (big win result or small win result) that is a special game state advantageous to the player in red, which is a warm color that gives a relatively warm impression. , A cold color or neutral color that gives a cold impression (such as blue and green other than warm colors) is different from the special game state. Notifies the specific result (time saving pattern) that becomes a specific game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can easily associate the magnitude of the hit of the stop symbol (magnitude of the game value), and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Here, warm colors have longer wavelengths (average wavelengths) and lower color temperatures than cold and neutral colors. Neutral colors are colors that are neither warm colors nor cold colors. system color). In addition, in this embodiment,
Special figure 2 so that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game can be a time saving pattern (winning per support)
A time reduction determination value is set for the variable display game, and support hit determination processing is executed. When the big-hit random number matches the time-saving determination value, the lamp display section 1 can emit light in green (time-saving pattern).

In addition, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may be caused to emit light, and various lighting members provided in the game machine 10 (such as the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) may be caused to emit light. At that time, in particular, as a light emitting effect to notify that the lamp display unit 2 is a time saving pattern, these lighting members not only emit normal white light, but also display modes corresponding to the time saving pattern (for example, green). Light may be emitted, and the time-saving pattern may be lighted in rainbow colors or the like in the same manner as the big hit result to perform determination notification. In addition, by intentionally causing these lighting members to emit light in a color (for example, red) that is not the time-saving pattern, it is possible to make the player feel unexpectedness.

In this way, the lamp display portion 1 does not display the time saving pattern (for example, green) as the fourth pattern, but the lamp display portion 2 can display the time saving pattern. That is, the first
While the result of the special figure fluctuation display game does not become a time saving pattern (winning per support, specific result),
The result of the second special figure fluctuation display game can be a time-saving design (winning per support, specific result). On the other hand, as in the example (example 1, 2) of (A) of FIG. Circular lighting is performed so as to include green lighting), and it becomes the same mode as the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game in the lamp display unit 2.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the result of one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a time saving pattern (winning per support, specific result), a specific game state (specific game state B, time-saving state (time-saving mode)) advantageous to the player can be generated without generating a jackpot game state (special game state). In addition, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the time saving pattern (winning per support, specific result) of one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) The other variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) can be executed including the display mode (4th symbol time saving pattern (for example, green)).

Therefore, there are three or more patterns of display modes when the variable display is performed, making it easy to understand that the variable display is performed. In addition, since the lamp display units 1 and 2 can be made to have the same fluctuation mode, the control can be unified and the development efficiency can be improved. Furthermore, by making the fluctuation modes of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 the same, it is possible to give a sense of unity of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and to eliminate the sense of incongruity, and the production control device. The effect control of 300 can be simplified, and the processing can be lightened. In addition, the lamp display unit 3 for notifying the number of start memories (number of reservations)
-6 emits light in a single color (for example, red), while the lamp display units 1 and 2 display the display mode (green lighting) corresponding to the time saving pattern and the display mode (red lighting) corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result (red lighting) and off By repeating the above, the variation display (circular lighting) of the fourth pattern is performed in full color, so that it is easy to understand that the light emission corresponding to the special symbol variation display game is performed in the lamp display parts 1 and 2, and the game is interesting. can be improved.

In addition to the variable display mode described above in (A) of FIG. 95, in the lamp display unit 1 that displays the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the time saving symbol is not displayed, it varies depending on red lighting and extinguishing. Display may also be performed (lights out → lights up in red → lights out...). In this way, by performing the variable display only with the color used when the variation is stopped, the player can easily recognize that the time saving pattern is not stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. On the other hand, in the lamp display unit 2 that displays the fourth pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the time saving pattern is displayed, the variable display is performed by red lighting, green lighting, and extinguishing as in example 1 of FIG. 95 (A). can be done as Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the time saving pattern is stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game,
It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, in the lamp display units 1 and 2, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be performed by red lighting and extinguishing (extinguishing → red lighting → extinguishing . . . ). In such a mode as well, it is possible to perform a variable display using only the color used when the variation is stopped. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the lamp display unit 2 in this case, green lighting is performed only when the time saving pattern is stopped. Therefore, the lamp display part 2 is lit in green only when the time-saving pattern (won by the support hit) is lit, so that the player can easily recognize the time-saving pattern and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, by utilizing the fact that the lamp display units 1 and 2 are full-color LEDs, the game machine 10
When shifting to the AM initialization state (RAM clear mode), the lamp display sections 1 and 2 turn blue (B
) may emit light. By thus providing a state (mode) in which the lamp display units 1 and 2 emit blue light, it is possible to confirm that the blue elements (blue LEDs) of the lamp display units 1 and 2 are functioning. In addition, when the game machine 10 transitions to various states such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, 10 (movable accessories of the board effect device 44, projecting effect unit 13 of the frame decoration device 18, and lighting members (LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and frame decoration device 18, etc.). Alternatively, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit blue (B) light.

In addition, blue may be included as another color that does not result in a stop result in the cyclic lighting mode of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the lamp display parts 1 and 2. In this way, each element of the lamp display units 1 and 2 functions normally by including colors that can be displayed only by a single element (blue element) as colors that do not result in stoppage of the variable display game. It is possible to increase the chances of confirming the fact, emphasize the variable display mode, and inform the player of the variable display in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, if purple is replaced with blue in Example 3 of FIG. 95A, it can be confirmed whether the light emission of all the elements (RGB) of the lamp display portions 1 and 2 is normal or abnormal.

Furthermore, in the example (example 1) of FIG. 95B, the winning symbols are turned off when the stop result of the variable display game is a winning, but the winning symbols may be displayed by blue lighting. By using such blue lighting for the missing symbols, it is possible to inform the player of the stopping result of the variable display game in an easy-to-understand manner by using each element of the full-color LED, and to confirm whether the light emission of each element is normal or abnormal. can. In addition, these lighting modes and variable display modes can be used in combination as appropriate in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96, lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED
2) can emit light in, for example, red (R).
Display the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number, reservation number). Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) can emit light, for example, in red (R), and the number of (Second start memory count, hold count) is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 96, when the number of reservations is 0, the lamp display sections 3 and 4 are both extinguished, when the number of reservations is 2, they are on, and when the number of reservations is 4, they are blinking. When the number of reservations is 1, only the lamp display section 3 is turned on (the lamp display section 4 is turned off), and when the number of reservations is 3, only the lamp display section 3 is turned on (the lamp display section 4 is turned on). As for the flashing state, switching of the display mode (light-off and light-on) is performed, for example, every 100 msec. lamp display unit 5,
6 also displays the number of special figures 2 pending in a similar manner. In addition, the lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit. display.

94 to 96 have been described above, the following configuration is also possible as the fifth embodiment.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color other than red (orange, etc.) in the case of a big win result or a small win result. In addition, the lamp display unit 2 may emit light in a cold or neutral color (blue, blue-green (G+B), purple, etc.) other than green in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving pattern). In this way, if it is a big hit result or a small hit result, it emits light in a warm color, and if it is a time saving result, it emits light in a cold color or neutral color. ) is changed to emit light, the player can easily recognize that the time saving state is entered.

Note that the lamp display units 1 and 2 for executing the variable display game as an effect are extinguished and turned black in the case of a losing result. Classified by color, it is easy to associate the result of the variable display game with the lowest game value (profit). In addition, even if the deviation result is a cool blue color, it will turn off (black).
Similar to , it is easy to associate with the one with the lowest game value. In this way, the order of blue (black)→green→red indicating the gaming value of the results of the lamp display portions 1 and 2 by color, that is, the order of cold color system →neutral color system→warm color system in which the temperature increases as an image. However, it is the same as the order of the color jackpot expectations used in general notice effects such as the background effect and pending change notice on the display device 41, and is interlocked with the color jackpot expectations. This makes it easier for the player to associate that the game value associated with the results of the lamp display portions 1 and 2 increases in the order of cold colors, neutral colors, and warm colors. note that,
Contrary to the temperature as an image, the so-called color temperature decreases in the order of cold color (blue) → neutral color (green) → warm color (red).

In addition, the lamp display unit 2 may emit light in a color other than a cold color such as green or a neutral color in the case of a time saving result (may emit light in a warm color), a big hit result or a small hit result It can emit light in a mode (color) different from the mode (color) of . Furthermore, in the case of a big win result or a small win result, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light in a color other than a warm color such as red. You may replace so that the color in the case of a time-saving result may be red. In this manner, the mode (color) of the fourth pattern displayed by the lamp display portions 1 and 2 can be appropriately selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving result (for example, green) is not displayed as the fourth pattern in the lamp display unit 1, and the time saving result (for example, green) is displayed as the fourth pattern only in the lamp display unit 2. However, it may be reversed. That is, the lamp display portion 1 can display the time saving result as the fourth pattern, and the lamp display portion 2 can prevent the time saving result from being displayed as the fourth pattern. In this case, so that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game can be a time saving pattern,
And, so that the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not become a time saving pattern, there is no time saving judgment value for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is set outside the range of the jackpot random number value, or support hit judgment processing is performed. don't run In this way, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a time saving pattern and it is possible to enter the time saving state when in the normal game state, so that players who have not been able to play a big hit game Result) can be generated and given the opportunity to hold the ball for a long time,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the fourth display of the main variation display game (main variation display game) of the lamp display sections 1 and 2
Symbols may be displayed in a time saving result (eg, green), and the fourth symbol of a non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) may not be displayed in a time saving result (eg, green).
In this case, in each of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the time reduction judgment value at the time of the main variation display game is set so that it can match the big hit random value, and at the time of the secondary variation display game It is set so that the time saving judgment value cannot match the jackpot random value. for example,
The main variation display game in the normal game state becomes the special figure 1 variation display game, and the sub variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, the main variable display game in the specific game state is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, even if you do not win the support hit, the number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability state) is a predetermined number (so-called ceiling number, time-saving ceiling) (for example, 500 times) When it reaches, even if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 indicate that the time saving state (so-called time saving state due to ceiling time saving, play time) has entered.
may be emitted to notify the user. Thus, when entering the time saving state due to the ceiling time saving, the lamp display units 1 and 2 can emit light in a cold color such as green or a neutral color as the fourth pattern.

In addition, as shown in Example 2 of FIG. 95 (B), the fourth pattern of the lamp display units 1 and 2 when entering the time saving state due to the ceiling time saving is the color of the time saving pattern when winning per support ( (e.g. green) and a different color (e.g. purple (R+B)). In this way, the fourth pattern in the case of the ceiling time saving is a display format (purple By turning on the lighting), it is possible to provide an unexpected performance, and it is possible to inform the player that the ceiling time is shortened in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, the color of the time saving pattern when winning the support may also vary depending on the number of time saving times given after that (for example, the number of time saving times 3
Green for 0 times, yellow for 100 times of time saving).

Also, when entering the time saving state due to the ceiling time saving, either the lamp display unit 1 or 2 corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game that has reached the predetermined number of times, the above-mentioned time saving pattern (time saving result) as the 4th pattern It can be illuminated in the same manner (color, eg green) as it is displayed. note that,
The light emission mode of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 when the ceiling time is reduced may be different from the mode when the fourth pattern is the time reduction pattern. On the other hand, the time-saving pattern (for example, green) as the fourth pattern of the present embodiment can emit light only in the lamp display section 2 as described above, and is set so that the lamp display section 1 does not emit light.

Also, as described above in the first embodiment, when entering the time saving state due to the ceiling time saving, the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off in response to the fact that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost. good too. At that time, while the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off, the special figure display device and the display device 41 are removed as a stop pattern (may be a time saving pattern) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) can be displayed. As the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41,
For example, there is "3, 3, 5"("1, 1, 3" may be used as in the case of time saving by the support hit result) in which only the left pattern and the middle pattern are complete.

54 and 88, the game machine 10 capable of generating a predetermined number of times (for example, 99 times) of the time-saving state (general electric support state) after the big hit, the lamp display unit 2
A time-saving design (for example, green) may be displayed as the fourth design, or may not be displayed.

Specifically, in the time saving state (during the specific game state A) after the end of the big win, when winning the support hit, the time saving pattern can be displayed as the fourth pattern on the lamp display part 2.例文帳に追加According to such a mode, the time-saving design is displayed as the fourth design, so that the player can recognize that the support hit has occurred during the specific game state A, and can collect it as data. moreover,
As described in the third embodiment, when the time saving state (specific game state C) due to the support hit after the specific game state A is continued (overlapping), how is the time saving state due to the support hit after the specific game state A? It is possible for the player to easily grasp the number of times of time saving to be continued. In addition, the time saving pattern of the lamp display part 2 when the support hit occurs during the specific game state A is reduced when the support hit occurs when it is not in the specific game state A (for example, the support hit is won in the remaining hold). A color (eg, light blue) different from the color of the pattern (eg, green) may be used. In this way, by making the color of the time saving pattern different between when it is in the specific game state A and when it is not in the specific game state A, the player can recognize whether or not all the number of times of time saving by the support hit is given. It becomes easier and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when winning the support win during the time-saving state (during the specific game state A) after the end of the big win, the lamp display part 2 does not have to display the time-saving pattern as the fourth pattern. According to such a mode, since the time saving pattern is not displayed as the fourth pattern, the player cannot recognize that the support hit has occurred during the specific game state A, so that the player can easily concentrate on the game. Furthermore, the time saving state (specific game state C) due to the support hit after the specific game state A is not continued (does not overlap)
In the case of a game machine with specifications, even if you win a support hit during a specific game state A, the time saving pattern will not be displayed and you will not know that you have won, so even if you win a support hit, the number of time saving times will not increase. A player can be restrained from being discouraged.

In addition, when winning the support hit during the remaining reservation digestion after the time saving state, the time saving pattern can be displayed as the fourth pattern of the lamp display part 2.例文帳に追加Therefore, in both the specifications in which the above-mentioned specific game state A and the specific game state C overlap and the game machines in which the specifications do not overlap, it is possible to digest all the times of the specific game state C (time saving state due to the support hit) that has occurred. It becomes easy for the player to recognize it, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Regardless of whether or not the time-saving design is displayed as the fourth design on the lamp display unit 2, the time-saving design (for example, "1, 1, 3", etc.) can be displayed as the decorative stop design on the display device 41. According to this aspect, even if the time saving pattern is not displayed on the lamp display unit 2,
The time-saving pattern on the display device 41 allows the player to recognize that he/she has won the winning prize. Further, when the time saving pattern is displayed on the lamp display part 2, the winning of the support hit can be emphasized together with the time saving pattern on the display device 41, so that the player can easily recognize it.

On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the time-saving design is displayed as the fourth design on the lamp display unit 2, the display device 41 may not display the time-saving design as the decorative stop design. According to such a mode, the player cannot recognize that he or she has won the support prize from the decoration stop pattern of the display device 41, and can concentrate on the effect displayed on the display device 41, for example, and easily concentrate on the game. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment includes effect control means (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player when the result of the first variation display game or the second change display game is a special result (for example, a big win result). In the gaming machine 10, when the result of one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is a specific result (e.g., a time-saving pattern, winning at support), a special game state is generated. It is possible to generate a specific game state (for example, a time saving state (time saving mode), a specific game state B) that is advantageous to the player. The effect control means includes a display mode corresponding to the specified result of one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game (for example, a time saving pattern of the fourth pattern (for example, green)), A variable display game can be executed.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the display mode during the variable display of the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be made the same, so that the control can be unified and the development efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the display modes during the variable display of the first variable display game and the second variable display game are the same, it is possible to create a sense of unity and eliminate discomfort, and the effect control of the effect control means can be simplified. You can also lighten the process. Furthermore, since the other variable display game can be executed including the display corresponding to the specified result of the one variable display game, the number of patterns of the display mode when the variable display is performed in the other variable display game is increased and the variable display is performed. You can easily understand what you are doing.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300)
Display mode corresponding to the special result (for example, big hit result or small hit result) (for example, red of the 4th pattern), display mode corresponding to the specific result (time saving result) (time saving pattern of the 4th pattern (for example, green)
), and the display mode corresponding to results other than special results and specific results (disappearance (e.g., turning off))
Including, it is possible to display each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the number of patterns can be further increased by including three patterns in the display mode when the variable display is performed in the variable display game, so that the variable display can be made easier to understand. In addition, since the display modes corresponding to the special result, the specified result, and the lost result are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when each result is obtained, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is an effect control means (effect control device 300), and can generate a special game state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big win result or a small win result). When the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (e.g., a time-saving pattern, winning a hit at support), a specific game state advantageous to the player (e.g., time-saving state (time-saving mode), without generating a special game state, is established. Specific game state C) can be generated. The effect control means can display the result of the variable display game in a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, the LED of the lamp display device 80), and when the result of the variable display game (stop symbol) is a special result, the first A display mode (e.g., red (R), a warm color) is displayed, and when a specific result is obtained, a second display mode (e.g., green (B), a color other than the warm color) is displayed, and a special result or a specific result Otherwise, the third display mode (for example, off) is displayed.

According to this type of gaming machine 10, the result of the variable display game is notified using different colors depending on whether the result is a special result, a specific result, or a loss. can be easily grasped by the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 107. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The sixth embodiment includes a collective display device 50 capable of executing a variable display game and displaying information such as the game state, and a performance capable of displaying performance information such as a display probability setting value and a base value (ball payout rate). It relates to display control for the display device 152 and the like. Display control includes output data (display data) setting processing and output processing.

[Game control device]
FIG. 97 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the performance display device 152 performs display control (lighting control) similar to that of the collective display device 50 by a dynamic driving method (that is, dynamic lighting control). Details of the configurations of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are shown in FIGS.
06.

The collective display device 50 is located at the lower right corner or the like on the front side (player side) of the game board 30, and can be easily visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, the performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 arranged on the back side of the game board 30 (the side opposite to the player), and cannot be accessed unless the front frame 12 is opened. For this reason, the performance display device 152 (second display section) is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the batch display device 50 (first display section), and is usually invisible.

Collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 indicator 51 (LED lamp D1) and a special figure 2 indicator 52 (LED lamp D2
), 16 LED lamps D3-D18, that is, 8×2 LED lamps D3-D18 (FIG. 105
reference). Therefore, the collective display device 50 has a total of 32 segment LEDs, and can be regarded as a four-digit display device in which one digit is composed of eight segment LEDs. Segment LED
functions as a light-emitting element (light-emitting portion) of the collective display device 50 . In this embodiment, for example,
Special figure 1 indicator 51 is digit 0 (digit 0), special figure 2 indicator 52 is digit 1 (digit 1), LE
D lamps D3-D10 correspond to digit 2 (digit 2), and D11-D18 correspond to digit 3 (digit 3).

The 32 LEDs of the collective display device 50 are connected to 8 segment lines x 4 digit lines, resulting in 8 segment signals (ON/OFF drive signals) and 4 digit signals (ON/OFF signals). drive signal). Each digit line serves as a digit selection line for selecting the corresponding digit. Each segment line branches into four, and each of the branches is connected to the LED of each digit. For the wiring configuration of the segment lines and digit lines of the collective display device 50, for example, those disclosed in JP-A-2014-124247, JP-A-2015-57140, etc. can be used.

97, the output section 130 is provided with a third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 connected to the data bus 140, as in FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. The second driver 138b, which is a batch display segment driver, outputs the on/off drive signal output from the third output port 135 as a segment signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50. FIG. The third driver 138c, which is a collective display digit driver, outputs the ON/OFF drive signal output from the fourth output port 136 as a digit signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50. FIG.

DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 . A second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, drives the LED through the segment line.
LE by a third driver 138c that supplies a current to the anode terminal of LE and outputs a ground potential.
By extracting a current from the cathode terminal of D through the digit line of each digit, a current flows through the plurality of LEDs of the digits sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method to light them. In this embodiment,
The cathode common is such that the cathode terminals of the LEDs of each digit are commonly connected to the digit line. In the case of an anode common in which the anode terminals of the LEDs of each digit are commonly connected to the digit line, conversely, DC 12V is supplied to the third driver 138c, and the second driver 138b outputs the ground potential. .

The second driver 138b of the collective display device 50 receives the segment output data (described later) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 as 8-bit parallel data via the third output port 135, and converts the signal level (voltage conversion). ) to output as segment signals to eight segment lines. The second driver 138b may be configured to receive serial data. In this configuration, the second driver 138b performs serial-to-parallel conversion and signal level conversion, and outputs segment signals to eight segment lines.

Also, the third driver 138c of the collective display device 50 receives digit output data (described later) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 as 4-bit parallel data via the fourth output port 136, and converts the signal level ( voltage conversion) and output as digit signals to four digit lines. The third driver 138c may be configured to receive serial data. In this configuration, the third driver 138c performs serial-to-parallel conversion or signal level conversion and outputs digit signals to four digit lines.

The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment display (8-segment display including dots Dp) (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the number of performance display devices 152 is 32 (8
×4) segment LEDs. The segment LED functions as a light-emitting element (light-emitting section) of the performance display device 152 .

The 32 LEDs of the performance display device 152 are connected to 8 segment lines x 4 digit lines, resulting in 8 segment signals (ON/OFF drive signals) and 4 digit signals (ON/OFF signals). drive signal). Each digit line becomes a digit selection line for selecting a digit. Each segment line is branched into four, each of which is an LED for each digit
connected to The wiring configuration of the segment lines and digit lines of the performance display device 152 may be the same as that of the batch display device 50.
The wiring configuration of the collective display device 50 disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7140 or the like may be used.

In FIG. 97, the output section 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 and a seventh output port 142 connected to the data bus 140, unlike FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. The driver 150 a , which is a segment driver for performance display, outputs ON/OFF from the sixth output port 141 .
The off drive signal is output as a segment signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152 . A driver 150b, which is a digit driver for performance display, is connected to the seventh output port 14
2 is output as a digit signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the performance display device 152 .

A driver 150a that drives the segment lines of the performance display device 152 is supplied with DC 12V. A driver 150a that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a driver 150b that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the digit line of each digit. A current flows through the plurality of LEDs of the sequentially selected digits to light them. As with the collective display device 50, L for each digit
The cathode common is such that the cathode terminals of the EDs are commonly connected to the digit line, but the anode common may be used.

The driver 150a of the performance display device 152 receives segment output data (described later) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 as 8-bit parallel data via the sixth output port 141, and performs signal level conversion (voltage conversion). and output as segment signals to eight segment lines. The driver 150a may be configured to receive serial data. In this configuration, the driver 150a performs serial-to-parallel conversion and signal level conversion, and outputs segment signals to eight segment lines.

In addition, the driver 150b of the collective display device 50 receives digit output data (described later) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 as 4-bit parallel data via the seventh output port 142, and converts the signal level (voltage conversion). ) to output as digit signals to four digit lines. The driver 150b may be configured to receive serial data. In this configuration, the driver 150b performs serial-to-parallel conversion and signal level conversion and outputs digit signals to four digit lines.

[Main processing (game control device)]
FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing according to the sixth embodiment. Note that processing steps having the same contents as those in FIG. 5B of the first embodiment are given the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit in step A1047.
In the present embodiment, the random number generating circuit uses, as random numbers updated only by hardware, a jackpot random number, a hit pattern random number (a jackpot pattern random number, a small hit pattern random number, a supporting pattern random number, etc.).
, to generate a random number for the normal figure. These random numbers are so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than that of the operating clock. In addition, unlike the first embodiment, the winning symbol random number and the winning random number of the normal pattern are also updated only by hardware.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A11048), and determines whether or not the game is stopped (A11049). Games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, etc.)
It can be determined that the game is stopped when a strong error 2 (to be described later) that requires the game to be stopped occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A11049 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the information (value) of the flag register to the stack area for game control (A110
50), execute performance display editing processing for calculating performance information such as base value (ball output rate) (A
11051). The performance display editing process is the same as step A1052 in FIG. 5B, and the details will be described later. After that, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (A11052), and the interrupt is permitted (A1053). In addition to the case where no error has occurred at all, even if a weak error (described later) or a strong error 1 (described later) which is an error other than the strong error 2 has occurred, the game is not stopped and the performance display editing process is performed. The processing of steps A11050 to A11052 is executed including the above. Note that if a weak error or strong error 1 has occurred, step A110
A configuration that does not execute the processing of 50-A11052 is also possible.

In addition, as will be described later, when shifting to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is moved from the game control stack area related to game control to the performance display stack area related to performance information and performance display (performance information display) switch to At that time, the stack pointer for game control is RA
Since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag registers (especially the zero flag) will change when saving in the stack pointer saving area of M111c, the information in the flag registers is previously saved in step A11050. The flag register is a flag in which each bit of 8 bits takes a value of 0 or 1. For the flag register, refer to JP-A-2013-23329
9, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-94101, etc. can be used.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the game is stopped (the result of A11049 is "Y"
), the interrupt is permitted without executing the performance display editing process, etc. (A1053). Namely
Since performance display editing processing (in particular, base value calculation processing during performance display editing processing) is not executed when strong error 2 occurs, performance information such as a base value is not newly calculated and does not change. It should be noted that, even if the strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to execute the performance display editing process without stopping the game.

After step A1053, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A11048. As a result, step A1104 continues until a power failure occurs.
The loop processing of 8-A1054 is repeated. Then, until a power failure occurs, unless the game is stopped, that is, unless a strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (A11051
), performance information such as base values can be calculated repeatedly.

Since the repetition period of the loop processing is considerably shorter than the interrupt period of the timer interrupt (predetermined time period, eg, 4 msec), the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt period. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize or the number of discharged balls changes (a game ball enters the out port 30b), the performance information such as the base value can be changed immediately.

In this embodiment, errors are classified into three categories: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the error/injustice system command sets error notification of different strength corresponding to the weak error, the strong error 1, and the strong error 2 in the error/injustice setting process (B1316). can run.

For example, the production control device 300, the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker, or the brightness (brightness) of the LED (the LED of the board decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18) that emits light for error notification The error may be increased in the order of error < strong error 1 ≤ strong error 2 . Note that the sound volume of the speaker or the brightness of the LED may be the same for the strong error 1 and the strong error 2. FIG. In addition, when a weak error occurs, the effect control device 300 sets the volume of the notification sound to the volume (below the maximum volume) adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), and strong error 1 and strong error 2. occurs, the volume of the notification sound may be set to the maximum volume.

The weak error is a shot ball exhaustion error such that a shot ball exhaustion switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the bottom tray 23 becoming full. Including overflow errors like In a weak error, no external information signal is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 44A). Further, the weak error may include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

A strong error 1 is an error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a body frame opening error (front frame opening error). In strong error 1, the door/frame open signal (A
9505) is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 44A).

Severe error 2 is a fraudulent error related to fraud, and it is preferable to stop the game. , including power and electric fraud. In strong error 2, the security signal (
A9521) is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 44A). Also, the strong error 2 may include the remaining ball error. When a strong error 2 occurs, the game (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, etc.) is stopped, and it can be determined that the game is stopped (A11049
).

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) according to the sixth embodiment. Note that the processing steps having the same content as in FIG. 6A of the first embodiment include:
The same step numbers are attached and the description is omitted.

The game control device 100 executes the random number update process (A11308) after the payout command transmission process (A1307). The random number update process is similar to the random number update process 2 (A130
Corresponding to 9), the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are updated. Unlike the first embodiment, the winning symbol random number and the winning random number of the normal pattern are updated only by hardware, so there is no process corresponding to the update random number update process 1 (A1308) for updating these by software.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1310
). After that, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (A11311). Step A1104
Similar to 9, when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs, it can be determined that the game is stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A11311 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (A1312a), role game processing (A1312b), normal figure game processing (A
1313), and executes segment LED edit processing (A1314). Then step A
1315-A1319 is executed. In addition to the case where no error has occurred at all, even if a weak error and a strong error 1 have occurred, special figure game processing (A1312a), role game processing (A1312b), general figure game processing ( A1313), and segment LED edit processing (A1314) is executed.

In the segment LED editing process, settings related to the driving of some of the plurality of segment LEDs (LED lamps D3-D8, D10-D16) constituting the collective display device 50 (FIG. 105) are executed. Other parts of the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1, D2, D17,
D18) drive setting, etc., symbol variation control processing (A2615, A2617, A76
15). Settings related to the driving of another part (the LED lamp D9) of the collective display device 50 are executed in the power failure restoration process (A1045).

When the game is stopped (the result of A11311 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (A1312a), accessory game processing (A1312b), normal figure game processing (A
1313), without executing the segment LED editing process (A1314), step A
1315-A1319 is processed. Thus, when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the special figure game process (A1312a) and the general figure game process (A1313) are not executed, so the number of special figure reservations (A2906) and the number of general figure reservations (A7707) does not change. On the other hand, if a weak error or a strong error 1 occurs, the special game process (A13
12a) and normal game processing (A1313) are executed, so the number of special figures pending (A2906)
and the number of pending charts (A7707) can be changed by +1 update.

In addition, depending on the type of error such as weak error, strong error 1 and strong error 2, special figure game processing (A1312a), character game processing (A1312b), general figure game processing (A1313)
, and segment LED edit processing (A1314), but not the others. For example, only the segment LED editing process may be executed when a strong error 2 occurs.

After step A1319, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A11320). Similar to step A11311, when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped has occurred, it can be determined that the game is being stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A11320 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the flag register in the game control stack area (A11321), and the performance display device 152
performance display monitor control processing for making settings related to the display of , etc. (A11322). The performance display monitor control process is the same as step A1320 in FIG. 6A, but the details will be described later.
After that, the flag register is restored (A11323), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In addition to when no error has occurred at all, even when a weak error and a strong error 1 have occurred,
Steps A11321-A113 including performance display monitor control processing, etc., not during game stop
23 processes are executed.

As will be described later, when shifting to performance display monitor control processing, the stack pointer is switched from the game control stack area related to game control to the performance display stack area related to performance information and performance display. At that time, since the flag (zero flag) of the flag register may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, the flag register is previously saved in step A11321.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped, the game control device 100 (the result of A11320 is "Y"
), the timer interrupt processing ends without executing the performance display monitor control processing or the like. That is, since the performance display monitor control process is not executed when the strong error 2 occurs, the display contents of the performance display such as the base value are not updated.

In addition, unlike the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped and the special game process (A
1312a), accessory game processing (A1312b), general-purpose game processing (A1313), and segment LED editing processing (A1314). It is also possible to configure the performance display monitor control process and the like to be executed even if the strong error 2 occurs.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1306) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

First, the game control device 100 outputs OFF data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 97) for outputting segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50, and resets the output port 135 (A1601 ). Next, the big winning opening solenoid 38b,
39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the common solenoid 37c.

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (adds only 1, but 0 after 3). updated) (A1603). In addition, L corresponding to the value of the digit counter
Digit output data to the ED digit line is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired digit output data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the segment output data for the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (A1608). This segment area may be included in the control information area of the game control work area (game control work area) consisting of the probability set value area, the random number area, the control information area, and the like.

In this way, each time the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected, and segment output data is output to the eight segment lines of the digit connected to this digit line. be done. Digit 0 to digit 3 (digits 0 to 3) are sequentially selected to realize a dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50. FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), further synthesizes the synthesized external information data and the output data of launch permission (A1610), and finally external information/launch permission signal output port 1
37 (A1611). Next, the relay board 7 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test equipment
The data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on 0 are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (A1612). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A
1613).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, (A1614). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615
). Then, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs OFF data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for outputting segment data of the performance display device (LED) 152 and resets the output port 141 (A1617). Next, the value of the digit counter 2 for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the performance display device 152 is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (only 1 is added, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1618). . Further, the digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter 2 is acquired (A1619). and,
Output the acquired digit output data to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (
A1620).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1621). As described above, when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs, it can be determined that the game is stopped. If the game is not stopped (the result of A1621 is "N"), the segment output data is loaded from the performance display device segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter 2 (A1622). The performance display device segment area is included in the performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). Then, the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1623), and then the output processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the game is stopped (the result of A1621 is "Y")
, the output process ends without executing the processes of steps A1622 and A1623. Therefore, when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to the output port 141, so the off data of step A1617 is output to the output port for the performance display device 152 as it is. 141. Then, in this case, when the value of the digit counter 2 cycles through the range of 0 to 3, the performance display device 152
All the LEDs are forcibly extinguished and hidden, and the person in charge or the staff of the game hall who sees the performance display device 152 knows that the game is stopped or that a strong error 2 (illegal error) has occurred. recognizable.

In this embodiment, even when the game is stopped, the segment output data is output from the segment area for the collective display device 50 to the output port 135, and the collective display device 50
The display of 0 is maintained as it was before the game was stopped. This can prevent the player from being surprised. Conversely, however, when the game is stopped, the segment output data from the segment area for the collective display device 50 is not output to the output port 135, and the performance display device 1
Similarly to 52, all the LEDs may be forcibly turned off to hide the collective display device 50. FIG. By doing so, the player who sees the collective display device 50 will be notified that the game is stopped or that the strong error 2 (
It is possible to recognize that an illegal system error) has occurred.

Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, it is possible to configure such that the processing of steps A1622 and A1623 is executed without stopping the game.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch/status monitoring process (A131
0) will be described in detail. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper big winning opening switch 39a in the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, even though the upper special winning opening is not open, the upper special winning opening is monitored to see if there is any illegal winning and normal winning is detected (A2002).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower winning opening switch 38a in the lower winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (A2003). Then, even though the lower special winning opening is not open, the lower special winning opening is monitored for illegal winning and normal winning is detected (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2005). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2006). Next, prepare a winning gate monitoring table for winning gate switches that can always win and do not require fraud monitoring (A20
07). The winning opening switch that can always win a prize is the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the general winning opening 35, and the like.

Next, the game control device 100 executes winning number counter update processing for updating the winning number (
A2008). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (A2009). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2010). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2011).
.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (switch abnormality error ) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball out error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout error status signal (payout error) is set. monitoring is set. In this way, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 monitors weak errors.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2013).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2014). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2014
result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2016.

In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0, the game control device 100 (A2
The result of 014 is "Y"), and the payout busy signal check process for setting the busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is executed ( A2015), and the process proceeds to step A2016.

Since the processing of step A2015 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4ms, A201 will be executed every 16ms.
5 processing will be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 executes V passage timing monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area switch 72 at inappropriate timing (A2016). In the V passage timing monitoring process, when the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it is regarded as a V passage error.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring whether or not a game ball remains in the specific area switch 72 (A2017), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

It should be noted that the V passage timing monitoring process and the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning hole switch/status monitoring process are necessary for a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine (1 + 2 types machine) such as this embodiment, and are normal 1 type pachinko. It may not be necessary for the machine.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In addition, the same step numbers are attached to the processing steps having the same contents as those in FIG. 6B of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 102, the probability setting change/ 4 shows a flowchart of confirmation processing.

Game control device 100, in the same way as in FIG. 6B, after executing the processing of steps A2401-A2409, the work set value area (in RAM111c or register) +1 update within the range that can take the set value for work, The probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by +1 corresponding to the work setting value (A2410). After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

Note that the possible range of the work setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of multi-step setting in which a plurality of probability setting values exist, but is only 0 in the case of single-step setting. In the case of multi-step setting, the work setting value and the probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of single-step setting, the values remain the same even if they are updated. Yes (updated to the same value).

[Performance display editing process]
Details of the performance display editing process (A11051) in the main process (FIG. 98) will now be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area in the performance display work area (performance display work area) (A1201), and sets the stack pointer as the value of the performance display stack area to the performance display. An address value indicating the top of the stack area for the application is set (A1202). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the game control stack area to the performance display stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the register information (value) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the performance display stack area (A1203).
Here, it is preferable to save all general purpose registers. Then, the performance display work area is judged to be justifiable, and if it is incorrect and abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting) (A1204). .

In the validity determination, if the value stored in the performance display work area is a design-impossible value or deviates from the design value (outside a predetermined range), it can be determined to be invalid. For example, it determines whether or not a specific value (for example, 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialized flag indicating that the performance display work area has been initialized, and divides the data used to calculate the base value. Determines whether the number used to manage the progress of processing is within a predetermined range, determines whether the value of the switch counter (to be described later) is within a range equal to or less than the number of switches to be monitored, and determines the current display period (described later). Determines whether the indicated display period management number is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3), and determines whether the total section number indicating the current total section (described later) is within the range of the number of sections (0 to 4). judge. in this way,
In the validity determination, it is preferable to determine whether the value of the area used as a pointer for the data table is within a predetermined range. This can prevent the program from running out of control by acquiring an out-of-range value. Moreover, it is effective because the validity determination is performed for each performance display editing process.

In addition, since the validity determination is executed each time the performance display editing process (A11051) is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, initialization can be executed immediately, and an abnormal performance display (abnormal Display of base value, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, initialization of the performance display work area (including initial value setting) targets areas other than the stack pointer storage area so as to protect the stack pointer storage area. Although the performance display stack area is not initialized in this embodiment, it may be initialized. Even when the performance display stack area is initialized, the values of the registers saved in the performance display stack area are protected and not initialized. Since the initialization of the performance display work area is executed separately from the initialization of the game control work area and the game control stack area, it affects the game control work area and the game control stack area. do not have.

In addition, the RAM 111c of the game control work area (game control work area), game control stack area, performance display work area (status display work area), performance display stack area (status display stack area) Regarding the arrangement in the address space, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-585
03 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-58519.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is time to switch the tabulation interval for tabulating the data (the number of normal out balls, the number of normal winning balls, etc.) that is the basis of the calculation of the base value (ball output rate). (A1205). A tally section is provided for the total number of out balls (total number of discharged balls, total number of out balls) from the time the power is turned on when the amusement center opens, and each time the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (
For example, every time it increases by 60000), the aggregation interval is switched.

For example, the switching timing of the tally section is the timing when the total number of out balls from turning on the power reaches 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, . . . That is, the width of the aggregation interval is basically 60000 except for the first aggregation interval,
1st aggregation interval = 0 to 300, 2nd aggregation interval = 300 to 60300, 3rd aggregation interval = 6
0,300 to 120,300 pieces, 4th tally interval=120,300 to 180,300 pieces, 5th tally interval=180,300 to 240,300 pieces, and so on. The tally section numbers indicating the first to fifth tally sections are 0 to 4, respectively, and the tally section number is maintained at 4 for the sixth and subsequent tally sections. Note that the current aggregate section number is stored in the performance display work area.

The game control device 100, when it is time to switch the tabulation section (the result of A1205 is "Y"), sets the tabulation section switching (A1206). In the switching setting of aggregation interval,
A total out counter that counts the total number of out balls (total number of outs), a normal out counter that counts the number of normal out balls (number of normal outs), which is the number of out balls (number of discharged balls) in each aggregation section, and each Clear the normal prize ball counter that counts the number of normal prize balls that is the total number of prize balls (number of won balls) in the total section, or the final base value (or the latest base value) of each total section or shift (move) to the base value storage area.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (A120
7). In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 97).

Here, the switch rising edge information (copied in step A2506 in FIG. 104) copied to the performance display work area for each input port to be monitored is checked. For each monitored input port, there is an 8-bit field to store the copied switch rising edge information. It can be determined that there is no input when the switch rising edge information for all input ports to be monitored is all 0, and it can be determined that there is an input in other cases. As the switch rising edge information, the bit corresponding to the switch with new input (detection) is set to 1 in the input processing (A1303) unless masked during copying, and the bit corresponding to the switch without new input is set to 1. bit is set to 0.

The game control device 100 (A12
07 result is "Y"), the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter is checked to obtain the input information (A1208). The target switches here are the lower large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the starting opening 1 switch 36a of the first starting winning opening 36, Starting mouth 2 switch 37a of the second start winning mouth 37 (normal variable winning device), winning mouth switch 35a of the general winning mouth 35 (
A left winning slot switch, a right winning slot switch), an out ball detection switch 74, etc. can change the base value (or ball output rate) by detecting game balls.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the valid period of the target switch (A
1209). It should be noted that if fraudulent misconduct of the large winning prize or fraudulent use of electric power occurs,
When winning a prize is invalid, that is, the big winning opening switches 38a, 39a and the start opening 2 switch 37a
may not be valid. In addition, there are always effective switches such as the first starting winning port 36 and the out ball detection switch 74 .

If the game control device 100 is valid period of the target switch (the result of A1209 is "
Y"), and determines whether or not there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (A1
210). If it is not the effective period of the target switch (result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (result of A1210 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1218.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "Y"
), clear the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211),
It is determined whether or not it is in the normal base state (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period in which the base value can be calculated and updated, and in the present embodiment, the normal game state (
1st game state).

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal game state) (A121
2 is "Y"), and if the target switch is a switch to which prize balls are awarded, the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch is added to obtain the total number of prize balls in the tally section. The number is updated (A1213). Subsequently, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the number of normal out balls (the number of normal out balls, the number of normal discharged balls), which is the number of out balls in the counting interval, is updated (A1214). ). Next, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the total number of out balls (total number of out balls, total number of discharged balls) is updated (A1215).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (that is, all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only the game ball that entered the out hole 30b, but also the game ball that entered the winning hole (first start winning hole 36, second starting winning hole 37, big winning hole, or general winning hole 35) It is detected by being guided to the out-ball detection switch 74 via a passage or the like.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal base state which is the normal game state (A121
If the result of 2 is "N"), neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls is updated, and only the total number of out balls is updated (A1215). Therefore, in the high base state (second game state, time saving state, probability variable state or special game state) that is not the normal base state, neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls is updated, and the number of normal prize balls and the normal out ball The base value, which is calculated from the numbers as described below, is not updated and remains unchanged. It is also possible to omit the determination processing relating to the normal base state in step A1212 and make the base value updateable (changeable) as the payout rate in all game states.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the switch counter by +1 in order to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (A1216). It should be noted that the performance display editing process is executed at time intervals (for example, several μm
sec). Thus, during the interrupt period, the performance display edit process is repeatedly executed, and the switch counter (eg, 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (eg, bit 0 to bit 7) for each monitored input port. . Also, the switch counter is set to the final value (e.g., 7
) to start checking the input of the switch for the next monitored input port. For example, after first checking the input of the switch with respect to the third input port 124 , the input of the switch is then checked with respect to the fourth input port 126 .

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) for calculating a base value when there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports (the result of A1207 is "N"). (A1217). It should be noted that there is a case where there is no switch input from the beginning to the input port to be monitored. On the other hand, even if some or all of the monitored input ports initially have switch inputs, after the switch inputs have been checked for all monitored input ports, the target switch input Since the information has been cleared (A1211), there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated by the number of normal prize balls/the number of normal out balls. Therefore, the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36
, normal variable winning device 37), large winning opening, or general winning opening 35, when a ball enters, as a first step, winning opening switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, to which prize balls are awarded, 3
The number of winning balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of 9a, and the base value is changed. Base value changes. That is, when one game ball enters the winning hole, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball enters the out port 30b opening in the game board 30, the number of out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value also changes. On the other hand, when there is a ball entering the normal figure start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated and do not change by the ball entering itself, so the base value is maintained without changing. be. Even if there is a ball entering the normal figure starting gate 34, the number of prize balls is not normally updated because no prize balls are given.

The base value is output as a performance display to the performance display device 152 by the processing of steps A1617 to A1623 of the output processing regardless of whether or not it has changed. However, when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the performance display device 152 outputs OFF data and turns off.

As a special example, the real-time value of the base value (bL
. ) is displayed, the base value may be calculated only during the real-time value display period. is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1218), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A1219), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the game control stack area.

In FIG. 103, the process of step A1217 is performed immediately after step A1214, and the number of normal winning balls or the number of normal out balls is updated without waiting for the input check of all the switches of the input port to be monitored. A configuration is also possible in which the base value calculation process is performed immediately after the calculation.

[Performance display monitor control process]
Next, the details of the performance display monitor control process (performance display device control process) (A11322) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display monitor control processing.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area in the performance display work area (performance display work area) (A2501), and sets the stack pointer as the value of the performance display stack area to the performance display. An address value indicating the top of the stack area for the application is set (A2502). The processing of steps A2501 and A2502 is the same as the processing of steps A1201 and A1202 in FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the register information for both the register bank 0 and the register bank 1 to the performance display stack area (A2503). Here, it is preferable to save all general purpose registers. Then, the performance display work area is validated, and if it is not valid, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting) (A2504). Steps A2503 and A2504
is the same as the processing of steps A1203 and A1204 in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes initial display timer update processing (A2505).
In the initial display timer update process, a timer is set for all blinking control (initial display control) to blink all the LEDs of the indicators of each digit of the performance display device 152 for about 5 seconds at the start of the performance display (after the power is turned on). make an update.

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port for which the base value is to be calculated to the performance display work area (A2506). Switch rising edge information is obtained in the input process work area for game control (especially switch control area)
(A1303). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 are the target input ports for base value calculation (input ports to be monitored). The copied switch rising edge information is used in the performance display editing process (FIG. 103).

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls does not change directly, and the rising edge information (bit) of the switch that is not subject to the calculation of the base value is copied in a clear state ( mask). For example, the gate switch 34a and the specific area switch 72
, remaining ball discharge port switch 73, etc. are copied in a cleared state. As a result, the processing related to these switches (at least the clear processing of A1211) can be omitted in the performance display editing processing.

It should be noted that the number of normal out balls is temporarily the winning opening switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a,
39a, out ball detection for detecting all game balls discharged from the game area 32 when updated by the input (game ball detection) itself from the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. The switch 74 is redundantly updated, and the base value is calculated as an erroneous value. In addition, the number of normal prize balls is temporarily updated by input (game ball detection) at the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, which overlaps with the switch of the winning hole and allows the game ball to pass. If it is done, it will be updated redundantly overlapping with the switch of the winning opening, and the base value will be calculated as an incorrect value.

Next, the game control device 100 executes performance display device display processing (A2507). In the performance display device display processing, the performance display device 15
Set the segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed in 2. For example, as display periods, a real-time value display period BL, a one-time previous display period B1, a two-time previous display period B2, and a three-time previous display period B3 are provided as display periods. Real-time value, previous aggregation interval, 2
The segment output data corresponding to the base value measured throughout the previous aggregation interval and the three-time aggregation interval may be set.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period, and determines whether or not it is time to switch the display period (A2508). If it is time to switch the display period (result of A2508 is "Y"), the display period switching setting is executed (A2509), and the process proceeds to step A2510. The game control device 100 is
If it is not time to switch the display period (result of A2508 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2510 without executing the display period switching setting.

In the switching setting of the display period, the switching setting of the information of the display period is performed like BL→B1→B2→B3→BL→ . Also, the initial value of the timer for period switching (for example, the initial value corresponding to a predetermined period of 5 seconds) is set.

After that, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A2510), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A2511), and ends the performance display editing process. The processing of steps A2510 and A2511 corresponds to step A1 in FIG.
218 and A1219 processing.

[Collective display device]
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The configuration of the collective display device 50 is the same as that described in the first embodiment, but the general-purpose display device 53 has LED lamps D17 and D1.
8, and the fact that the second game state display unit 58 is composed of an LED lamp D10 is changed from the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 indicator 51 (LED lamp D1) and the special figure 2 indicator 52 (LED lamp D2) are
For example, the lighting and extinguishing (blinking) of the central segment is switched for a predetermined switching time (for example, 100 ms).
After repeatedly variably displaying the identification information (special symbol) in ec), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are displayed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode as a stop symbol. In the symbol variation control process (A2615, A2617), special figure 1 indicator 51 and special figure 2
Segment output data (display data, lighting pattern data) to the display 52 is set and saved in each segment area (8 bits). 100, the segment output data loaded from this segment area when the value of the digit counter is 0 or 1 is output to the segment line output port 135 of the collective display device 50 (A1608). .

Normal figure indicator 53, each LED lamp D17, D18 repeats lighting and extinguishing (blinking) at a predetermined switching time (for example, 100 msec) After the identification information (normal pattern) is displayed variably, the predetermined result mode is stopped. By displaying, the normal figure fluctuation display game is displayed. The normal symbols having display modes (lighting patterns) corresponding to the variable symbol numbers 0 and 1 are switched at 100 msec. In the pattern variation control process (A7615), set the segment output data of the normal figure display 53 and save it in the area (2 bits) of the LED lamps D17 and D18 in the 8-bit segment area of the digit 3 (digit 3). do.

Special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 (LED lamp D11, D12) and special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 (LE
D lamps D13 and D14) use the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the LED lamps, respectively,
The special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) are displayed as shown in the table of FIG. Lighting and extinguishing (blinking) is performed at a predetermined switching time (for example, 128 msec). In the segment LED editing process (A1314), set the segment output data corresponding to the number of special figures 1 pending, LED lamps D11, D12 area (2 bits) out of the 8-bit segment area of digit 3 (digit 3) save to . In addition, segment LE
In the D editing process, set the segment output data corresponding to the number of special figures 2 pending, digit 3 (
In the 8-bit segment area of digit 3), the area (2
bit).

The normal figure holding indicator 56 (LED lamps D15, D16) turns on and off the LED lamp,
By using blinking, the number of normal pattern holding (normal pattern start memory number) is displayed as shown in the table of FIG. 105 . Lighting and extinguishing (blinking) is performed at a predetermined switching time (for example, 128 msec). In the segment LED editing process, set the segment output data corresponding to the normal figure reservation number and save it in the area (2 bits) of the LED lamps D15 and D16 in the 8-bit segment area of the digit 3 (digit 3).

Thus, the segment output data saved in the 8-bit segment area of digit 3 (digit 3) corresponding to LED lamps D11-D18 is stored in the output process (FIG. 100) when the value of the digit counter is 3. , and output to the segment line output port 135 of the collective display device 50 (A1608).

The round display unit 60 (LED lamps D3-D7) uses the lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamps to display the round number upper limit, which is the number of rounds at the start of the big win, as shown in the table in FIG. In the segment LED editing process, the segment output data corresponding to the round LED output pointer (A5803) is set as the display data corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds, and the LED lamp in the 8-bit segment area of digit 2 (digit 2) is set. Save in area D3-D7 (5 bits).

The first game state display unit 57 (LED lamp D8) uses the lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamp to indicate that the game is right-handed or left-handed (normally) as shown in the table in FIG. do. In the segment LED editing process, the segment output data corresponding to the left-handed number or the right-handed number in the gaming state display number 2 area is set, and the digit 2 is set.
segment area (
1 bit).

The second game state display unit 58 (LED lamp D10) uses the lighting, extinguishing, etc. of the LED lamp to indicate that there is no time saving (when time saving is not activated) or there is time saving (when time saving is activated). to display as In the segment LED editing process, the segment output data corresponding to the number without time saving or the number with time saving in the game state display number area is set, and the second game state is set in the 8-bit segment area of digit 2 (digit 2) It is saved in the segment area (1 bit) of the display section 58 (D10).

The third game state display unit 59 (LED lamp D9) uses the lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamp to display the high-probability state at power-on or any other state as shown in the table of FIG. do. In the power failure recovery process (A1045), when the power is turned on and the high probability state is set, the ON data is set as the segment output data, and the third game state display unit 59 is displayed in the 8-bit segment area of the digit 2 (digit 2). Save in the segment area (1 bit) of (D9).

Thus, the segment output data saved in the 8-bit segment area of digit 2 corresponding to the LED lamps D3-D10 are stored in the output process (FIG. 100) as follows:
When the value of the digit counter is 2, it is loaded and output to the segment line output port 135 of the batch display device 50 (A1608).

As described above, when entering the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), the number of reservations (first information, reservation information related to reservations, special figure 1 reservation number or Special figure 2 reservation number) is updated and changed, and is output and displayed on the collective display device 50. In this case, the base value (second information) is also changed as described above and is output to and displayed on the performance display device 152 .
A ball entry area that changes both the number of holdings and the base value by detecting a ball entering itself, such as the first start prize opening 36 or the second start prize opening 37, is called a first ball entry area (base The change in value is due to the award of prize balls).

In addition, under predetermined conditions (A2905) such that the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) has reached the upper limit, enter the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 when the ball
The number of reservations is not changed and is maintained at the upper limit value and is output to the collective display device 50, but the base value (second
information) is changed and output to the performance display device 152 . If the game does not stop even under a predetermined condition (A2713) such as during the occurrence of electric fraud, the number of reservations will not change and will be maintained at the upper limit when the ball enters the second start winning opening 37. However, the base value (second information) may be changed and output to the performance display device 152 .

When the ball enters the normal figure starting gate 34, the number of reservations (the first information, the reservation information related to the reservation, the normal figure reservation number) is updated and changed, and is output to the collective display device 50 and displayed. Also, in this case, the base value (second information) is output and displayed on the performance display device 152 without being changed, as described above. A ball entry area that changes the number of pending balls by detecting a ball entering itself, but does not change the base value, like the normal pattern start gate 34, is called a second ball entry region (the normal pattern start gate 34 is It is excluded that the passing game ball enters the winning hole or the out hole 30b to change the base value).

In addition, under certain conditions (A7705) such that the number of reservations (normal figure reservation number) has reached the upper limit
When the ball enters the normal figure start gate 34, the number of reservations is maintained at the upper limit without change and is output to the collective display device 50, and the base value (second information) is also the upper limit without changing. is maintained and output to and displayed on the performance display device 152 .

Out port 30b, big winning port (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39)
Alternatively, when the ball enters the general winning hole 35, the number of reservations (first information) is output and displayed on the collective display device 50 without changing. On the other hand, in this case, as described above, the base value (second information)
is changed and output to and displayed on the performance display device 152 . However, as described above, if the base value can only be updated in the normal base state, the base value will not change even if the ball enters the big winning hole. A ball-entering area such as the out hole 30b, the big winning hole, and the general winning hole 35, which does not change the number of pending balls but changes the base value by detecting a ball entering itself, is called a third ball-entering zone. By detecting a ball entering the out hole 30b, the base value usually changes through a change in the number of out balls, and by detecting a ball entering the big prize hole or the general prize hole 35, the number of prize balls usually changes. Since the base value changes with time, the out hole 30b may be distinguished from the big winning hole and the general winning hole 35 and regarded as a separate ball entry area.

In addition, as a special case, when the ball enters the out hole 30b or the general winning hole 35, when the special figure fluctuation display game (or the normal figure fluctuation display game) is accidentally started from the situation where the reserve is accumulated , Not only the base value but also the special figure reservation number (or the general figure reservation number) can be changed (it can be decreased by 1).

[Base value display mode]
With reference to FIG. 106, an example of the display mode of the base value displayed as the performance information on the performance display device 152 will be described.

FIG. 106 shows segment output data (display data, lighting pattern data) calculated in the performance display editing process (FIG. 103) and set in the performance display monitor control process (performance display device control process) (FIG. 104). The calculated base value is A1617- of the output process (Fig. 100)
A display example output and displayed by A1623 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 106, the base value is cyclically displayed by switching the type every 5 seconds (predetermined period). For example, the types of base values displayed are: real-time value during measurement → base value measured throughout the previous aggregation interval (that is, the final base value of the previous aggregation interval) → 2
Base value measured throughout the previous aggregation interval (that is, the final base value of the aggregation interval two times before) → Base value measured through the aggregation interval three times ago (that is, the final base value of the aggregation interval three times before) value) → real-time value during measurement → . . . Note that the real-time value is the latest base value of the tally interval during which the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are being measured, which is the basis of the calculation of the base value.

That is, a real-time value display period BL for displaying the real-time value of the base value, a previous display period B1 for displaying the final base value for the last tabulated interval, and 2 for displaying the final base value for the tabulated interval two times before. The display periods such as the last display period B2 and the 3rd previous display period B3 for displaying the final base value of the 3rd previous aggregation interval are switched in order every 5 seconds and cyclic. display period BL,
The display period management numbers of B1, B2, and B3 are 0 to 3, respectively, and the current display period management number is stored in the performance display work area.

The real-time value during the measurement of the base value is stored in the base value storage area 0 of the performance display work area. The final base values of the tabulation intervals one time before, two times before, and three times before are stored in the base value storage areas 1, 2, and 3 of the performance display work area. Then, the real-time value, the final base value of the tabulation interval before, the second, and the third are stored in the adjacent base value storage areas in the switching setting (A2509 in Fig. 104) when switching the aggregation interval. shift (move)
stored as

Here, digits 0 and 1 of the performance display device 152 correspond to identification segments (identification segments) that identify and indicate the type of base value. Digits 2 and 3 correspond to the ratio segment (ratio segment, numeric segment) that indicates the base value as a percentage (%). When the power is turned on, the aforementioned initial display (blinking of all segments of all digits) is displayed from digit 0 to digit 3 (A2505).

In addition, the identification segment (digit 0 and digit 1) corresponds to the real-time value during measurement of the base value, "
bL. ”, and display “b1.” corresponding to the final base value of the previous aggregation interval,
"b2." is displayed corresponding to the final base value of the aggregation interval two times before, and "b3." is displayed corresponding to the final base value of the aggregation interval three times before.

In addition, the ratio segment (digit 2 and digit 3) is "9
9. " is displayed, and when the counter value of the normal out counter for counting the number of normal out balls is 0, "00" is displayed.

Note that FIG. 106 is merely an example of the display mode of the base value, and for example, the real-time value may always be displayed on the performance display device 152 as the real-time value display period BL.

[Data output]
With reference to FIG. 107, how the segment output data (especially the number of pending output data) is output to the batch display device 50, and how the segment output data (especially the base value output data) is output to the performance display device 152 show the situation. Data is output from the game microcomputer 111 toward the collective display device 50 or the performance display device 152 . In addition, in FIG. 107, the game ball enters the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, or the normal figure starting gate 34, and the number of reservations is +1
Here is an example of updating.

First, the output (upper stage) of the segment output data displayed on the collective display device 50 will be described. The collective display device 50 sequentially outputs digit signals to the four digit lines each time the timer interrupt is processed, and the display data of all the LEDs are output by four interrupts.

In the standard timer interrupt processing (interrupt 1), the game ball enters the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, or the normal pattern starting gate 34. At this time, in the input process, start port 1
The input of the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, or the gate switch 34a is detected (entrance detection), and the number of reservations (special figure reservation number or normal figure reservation number) changes and is updated by +1 (special game A2906 during processing, A7707 during normal game processing). Then, in the segment LED editing process (A1314) of the timer interrupt process (interrupt 1), segment output data corresponding to the updated and changed pending number is set.

In the second timer interrupt process (interrupt 2) after the reference, the output process (A1 in FIG. 100
604-A1608), the output of the segment output data set in the timer interrupt processing (interrupt 1) when the ball is entered is started to be output to the collective display device 50. FIG. Here, for convenience, it is assumed that the value of the digit counter (A1603) at the start of output is 0, and the segment output data is digit 0 (digit 0)
Here is an example output from However, of course, the output may be started from the segment output data of digits other than digit 0.

After that, by the output processing of the third to fifth timer interrupt processing (interrupts 3 to 5),
Segment output data of digits 1 to 3 are output toward the collective display device 50 . note that,
As mentioned above, special figure 2 indicator 52 is digit 1, LED lamp D3-D10 is digit 2
, D11-D18 correspond to digit three. In the example of FIG. 107, the number of reservations that changed during the entry (the number of special reservations or the number of general drawings) is the fifth timer interrupt process (interrupt 5
) is output to the collective display device 50 in the first period until the completion of the above.

In addition, in FIG. 107, the first period required to output the number of pending balls (first information) at the time of entering the ball to the collective display device 50 (first display section) is indicated by the maximum value. If the value of the digit counter is 3 in the second timer interrupt process (interrupt 2), the first period is from the detection of the incoming ball to the completion of the second timer interrupt process (interrupt 2). That is, since the segment output data corresponding to digit 3 is output to the collective display device 50 after 1 to 4 interrupts from the output data setting, the maximum value in the first period is the fifth timer interrupt processing ( Interrupt 5)
until the completion of

Next, the output (lower stage) of the segment output data displayed on the performance display device 152 will be described. The performance display device 152 sequentially outputs digit signals to four digit lines for each timer interrupt process, and the display data of all the LEDs are output by four interrupts.

In the first timer interrupt process (interrupt 1) that serves as a reference, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, or the normal figure starting gate 34. Then, the switch rising edge information of the input port for which the base value is to be calculated, that is, the switch input information is copied to the performance display work area (A2506 during performance display monitor control processing). Then, the performance display editing process (A11051, FIG. 103) is repeatedly executed by the loop process in the main process (FIG. 98) until the next timer interrupt process (interrupt 2). Therefore, it is calculated by the base value calculation process (A1217 in FIG. 103), and the first start winning opening 3
6. A base value is obtained when the ball enters the second starting prize opening 37 or the normal starting gate 34.

It should be noted that it takes several tenths of a second or several seconds (several tens of (equivalent to interrupts several times or hundreds of times), etc.), the base value when these balls are entered is usually changed only by the number of winning balls, not the number of out balls (other games (Except when the ball happens to be detected simultaneously by the out-ball detect switch 74). After dozens or hundreds of interrupts,
When the game ball that has passed through the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, or the normal starting gate 34 reaches the out ball detection switch 74, the number of out balls is usually increased by 1 and the base value is again It usually changes depending on the number of out balls.

Since the information of the gate switch 34a is masked by clearing and copied to the performance display work area, the base value does not change even if it is calculated. Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the normal figure starting gate 34, the same value as before entering the ball is obtained as the base value at the time of entering the ball.

In the second timer interrupt process (interrupt 2) after the reference, the performance display monitor control process (
A11322) sets the segment output data corresponding to the base value calculated in the performance display editing process.

Also, in the third timer interrupt process (interrupt 3), the output process (A16 in FIG. 100
17-A1623), the output of the segment output data set in the second timer interrupt process (interrupt 2) to the performance display device 152 is started. Here, for convenience, it is assumed that the value of the digit counter 2 (A1618) at the start of output is 0, and the performance display device 1
An example output from digit 0 (digit 0) of 52 is shown. However, of course, the output may be started from the segment output data of digits other than digit 0. If the value of the digit counter 2 is made the same as the value of the digit counter, the digit 1 (digit 1) of the performance display device 152
), the output is started from the segment output data.

After that, by the output processing of the 4th to 6th timer interrupt processing (interrupts 4 to 6),
Segment output data of digits 1 to 3 (digits 1 to 3) are output to performance display device 152 . In the example of FIG. 107, the base value that changes when the ball is entered is output to the performance display device 152 during the second period from the detection of the entered ball to the completion of the sixth timer interrupt process (interrupt 6). In this embodiment, digits 0 to 3 are associated with digits 0 to 3 in FIG.
A configuration in which ~3 is associated with digits 3 to 0 in FIG. 106 is also possible.

In FIG. 107, the performance display device 152 (second display unit) displays the base value (second information) at the time of ball entry.
The second period required to output to is shown with the maximum value. If the performance display device 152 does not use the identification segment and sets the ratio segment indicating the base value as a ratio to the digit 0 and the digit 1, the second period is the fourth timer from the detection of the entering ball. Until the completion of interrupt processing (interrupt 4). Also, suppose that the digit counter 2 is set in the third timer interrupt process (interrupt 3)
is 2, then in the fourth timer interrupt process (interrupt 4) the ratio segment (digit 2 and digit 3)
, the second period can be said to be from the detection of the entering ball to the completion of the fourth timer interrupt process (interrupt 4). That is, the segment output data corresponding to the ratio segment is
Since the output data is output to the performance display device 152 after 1 to 4 interrupts from the setting of the output data, the maximum value of the second period is from the detection of the entering ball to the completion of the sixth timer interrupt process (interrupt 6). The length of the second period required to output the base value (performance information) at the time of ball entry to the performance display device 152 is the length of the second period required to output the number of pending balls (game information) at the time of ball entry to the collective display device 50. may differ from the length of the first period required for

As shown in FIG. 107, the maximum value of the second period (equivalent to 5 interrupt completions) is the maximum value of the first period (4
(equivalent to completion of an interrupt) is longer by the interrupt period of the timer interrupt (for example, 4 msec). This is a switch input information copy process (A25) for copying the switch rising edge information from the switch control area to the performance display work area in the process of outputting to the performance display device 152.
06) is performed. In this way, the switch input information copy process is a delay process for delaying the data output to the performance display device 152 from the data output to the batch display device 50 . As another delay processing, it is also possible to directly delay by counting a delay timer.

As described above, the maximum value of the second period is longer than the maximum value of the first period. Therefore, the display of the collective display device 50 (first display section), which is easily visible to the player, is more likely to be updated faster than the display of the performance display device 152 (second display section), which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. This prevents the player from misrecognising the display of the device 50, and the player can quickly recognize the reserved number, the variable display game, etc., and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, the display of the performance display device 152 (second display unit), which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, is more likely to be updated later than the display of the batch display device 50 (first display unit), which is easily visible to the player. Since the processing for display on the device 152 (setting and outputting segment output data) can be slowed down, the processing of the game control device 100 (game control means) is flexible.

As described above, a configuration is also possible in which the base value is calculated only during the real-time value display period BL (FIG. 106). In the case of this configuration, assuming that each display period is 5 seconds, 0 to
A delay of 15 seconds will occur. Therefore, in the case of this configuration, the maximum value in the second period required to output the base value at the time of ball entry to the performance display device 152 is This is 15 seconds longer than the maximum required first period.

The maximum value of such a long second period (equivalent to 15 seconds + 5 interrupt completion) is the third period required to output the special figure pending number at the time of entering the lamp display unit 3-6 of the lamp display device 80 longer than the maximum value of As described above, the lamp display unit 3-6 (LED lamp) of the lamp display device 80 notifies the number of special figures reserved for each special figure variation display game. In the third period,
In order to include the time for the production control device 300 to receive the special figure reservation number command from the game control device 100, the maximum value of the 3rd period is the maximum value of the 1st period shown in FIG. 107 or the maximum of the 2nd period value, but shorter than the maximum value of the second period (15 seconds + 5 interrupt completion equivalents) for the above configuration.

Therefore, even in the case of the configuration of the example of FIG. The display of the performance display device 152 (second display unit), which is difficult to see, can be updated more quickly, and the lamp display device 8
0 can be prevented from being mistakenly recognized, and the player can quickly recognize the reserved number, the variable display game, and the like, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, the display of the performance display device 152 (second display section), which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, is more likely to be updated later than the display of the lamp display device 80 (first display section), which is easily visible to the player. Processing for display on the device 152 (setting and output of segment output data) can be delayed according to the display period (BL, B1-B3), so the game control device 100
(Game control means) processing flexibility.

In the above description, the case where the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 have the same number of digits (4) has been described. , the maximum value of the second period in FIG. 107 may be made longer than the maximum value of the first period by delay processing that operates a delay timer or the like. Conversely, if the number of digits of the batch display device 50 is greater than four, wasteful processing can be omitted and the maximum value of the second period in FIG. good.

Also, with regard to FIG. 107, the case where the game ball enters the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, or the normal figure starting gate 34 and the number of reservations is updated by +1 has been described, but the out opening 30
b. When the ball enters the big winning opening, the general winning opening 35, the specific area 86, or the remaining ball discharge opening,
Since the number of reservations does not change, the same number of reservations as before the ball is output as the number of reservations when the ball is entered. The maximum value of the first period is the same regardless of whether the number of holds changes or not, and the processing for display on the collective display device 50 (setting and outputting segment output data, etc.) is made common. easier.

Information on the specific area switch 72 and the remaining ball outlet switch 73 is copied to the performance display work area in the same masked state as the information on the gate switch 34a. Even if the base value is calculated when the ball is hit, there is no change (the result of A1207 is "N" and the calculation itself is performed). Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific area 86 or the remaining ball outlet, the same value as before the ball is output as the base value at the time of entering the ball. Note that the maximum value in the second period is the same regardless of whether the base value changes or does not change,
It becomes easy to share processing for display on the performance display device 152 (setting and output of segment output data, etc.). A ball entry area such as the specific area 86 or the outlet for remaining balls that does not change the number of retained balls or the base value due to detection of a ball entering itself is called the fourth entry area (the specific area 86 or the outlet for remaining balls It is excluded that the game ball that has passed through the discharge port is further detected by the out ball detection switch 74 to change the base value).

[Functions and effects of the sixth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment includes game control means (game control device 1
00). The gaming machine 10 includes a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, a first display section (for example, a collective display device 50) that is visible to the player, and a second display section that is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the first display section. and a display unit (for example, the performance display device 152). The game control means, when the ball is entered in the entering area (for example, the start gate, the normal figure start gate 34, the out port 30b, etc.), the first information (for example, the number of reservations) at the time of entering the ball in the first period It can be output to the first display unit, and the second
Information (eg, a base value, different from the first information) can be output to the second display during a second time period. The maximum value of the second period (for example, corresponding to the completion of 5 interruptions after entering the ball) is set longer than the maximum value of the first period (for example, corresponding to the completion of 4 interruptions after entering the ball).

In such a gaming machine 10, a first display section (for example, the collective display device 50
) is more likely to be updated faster than the display of the second display unit (for example, the performance display device 152), which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Players can quickly recognize the first information (for example, the number of reservations), and the interest in the game is improved. Furthermore, the display on the second display unit, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, is likely to be updated later than the display on the first display unit, which is easy for the player to visually recognize. Since setting and output of output data) can be delayed, the processing of the game control means is flexible.

In the sixth embodiment, the ball entry area includes a first ball entry area (for example, a starting port) and a second ball entry area (
For example, the normal figure starting gate 34) and the third ball entry area (eg, the out port 30b, the big winning port, the general winning port 35) are included. The game control means changes the first information (for example, the number of normal pattern holdings) and outputs it to the first display unit when the ball enters the second entering area, but changes the second information (for example, the base value). output to the second display unit without When the game ball that has passed through the second ball entry area further enters the third ball entry area, the second information (for example, the base value) is changed and output to the second display unit, but the first information (for example, Output to the first display unit without changing the number of normal patterns reserved).

Therefore, when the ball enters the second ball-entering area and when the ball enters the third ball-entering area, the first information is displayed on the first display section and the second information is displayed on the second display section. can be suitably displayed. In addition, the first information can be output to the first display unit regardless of whether it changes or not, and the second information can be output to the second display unit whether it changes or not. Processing can be made common, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment, the game control means executes a predetermined process (for example, calculation of a base value) when the ball enters the first ball-entering area (for example, the starting hole), and as a result of the predetermined process, the second information (For example, the base value) can be changed and output to the second display section. Also, the second ball entry area (
For example, when entering the normal figure start gate 34), even if a predetermined process (for example, calculation of the base value) is performed, the second information (for example, the base value) is not changed as a result of the predetermined process, and the second Output to the display. Therefore, the second information can be appropriately obtained and can be preferably displayed on the second display section.

In the sixth embodiment, the game control means, in the case of entering the first ball area (for example, starting gate) and the case of entering the second ball area (for example, normal figure starting gate 34), the first The maximum value of the period is made the same, and the maximum value of the second period is made the same. Therefore, the process for outputting the first information (for example, the number of holds) to the first display unit can be easily shared between when the ball enters the first ball entering area and when the ball enters the second ball entering area. Along with this, the process for outputting the second information (for example, the base value) to the second display section can be easily standardized.

In the sixth embodiment, the ball entry areas include a first ball entry area (for example, the start gate), a second ball entry area (for example, the normal map start gate 34), and a third ball entry area (for example, the out gate 30b). ,including.
The game control means changes the first information (for example, the number of holdings) and outputs it to the first display unit when a ball entering the first ball entering area is detected, and outputs the second information (for example, a base value) to the first display unit. , different from the first information) is changed and output to the second display unit, and when a ball entering the second ball entering area is detected,
The first information (for example, the number of holds) is changed and output to the first display unit, and the second information (for example, the base value) is output to the second display unit without changing, and the ball is entered into the third ball entry area. is detected, the first information (for example, the number of pending) is output to the first display unit without changing, and the second
Information (for example, base value) is changed and output to the second display section.

Therefore, when a ball enters each ball entry area, the first information can be displayed on the first display section and the second information can be displayed on the second display section. In addition, the first information can be output to the first display unit regardless of whether it changes or not, and the second information can be output to the second display unit whether it changes or not. Processing can be made common, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment, when the ball enters the ball entry area (for example, the starting hole) under a predetermined condition (for example, the number of holds is the upper limit), the first information is output to the first display unit without being changed. At the same time, the second information is changed and output to the second display section. Therefore, even under certain conditions, the second
Information (eg, base values) can be updated and output to the second display.

In the sixth embodiment, when the ball enters the ball entry area (for example, the starting hole) while the first error (for example, weak error, strong error 1) is occurring, the first information (for example, the number of holds) is changed to First processing (e.g., special game processing and output processing) to output to one display unit, predetermined processing (e.g., base value calculation processing) for calculating the second information (e.g., base value), and changed as a result of the predetermined processing Second processing for outputting the second information to the second display unit (for example, A1622 and A16 in the output processing)
23 process) and . A second error different from the first error (e.g. strong error 2
), all or part of the first process, the second process, and the predetermined process are not executed.

Therefore, for example, a fraud-related error is treated as a second error, and only when the ball enters the ball entry area while the second error is occurring among the plurality of errors, the first process is not executed, and the first information ( For example, it is possible to output to the first display unit or stop the output itself without changing the holding number), thereby preventing the first information from being changed due to fraud and not notifying the player of the first information due to fraud. In addition, only when the ball enters the ball entry area while the second error is occurring among the plurality of errors, the predetermined processing is not executed and the second information (for example, the base value) caused by fraud is not calculated, again,
It is possible not to execute the second process and not to output the second information caused by fraud to the second display unit.

In the sixth embodiment, the game control means changes the first information (for example, the number of reservations) to change the first information (for example, the number of reservations) when the ball enters the ball entering area in the first game state (for example, normal game state, low base state). While outputting to the first display section, the second information (for example, base value) is changed and output to the second display section. However, when the ball enters the ball entry area in a second game state (for example, a specific game state, a high base state, and different from the first game state), the first information is changed and displayed on the first display unit. However, the second information is output to the second display unit without being changed.

Therefore, even if the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the second information is output to the second display section without changing from the first game state. Therefore, even if the second information in the second game state changes significantly from the first game state, the second information that does not change from the first game state is displayed on the second display unit. , the viewer's sense of incongruity disappears, and the viewer is not surprised.
Also, even if the second information is not originally displayed in the second game state, the second information in the first game state is displayed on the second display unit instead. A display that is not turned off can be displayed on the display unit, and the viewer's sense of discomfort is eliminated.

In the sixth embodiment, each of the first display section (for example, the collective display device 50) and the second display section (for example, the performance display device 152) is composed of a plurality of light-emitting sections. The game control means lights the first display section and the second display section by dynamic control. Therefore, since the first display section and the second display section are controlled by common control, it becomes easy to adjust the magnitude relationship (length relationship) between the maximum value of the first period and the maximum value of the second period.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is also possible to replace the time saving state with a probability variable state. For example, various combinations of multiple embodiments and multiple modifications are possible. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. In the slot machine, the ball payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the role ratio is
The ratio of the number of medals paid out by various bonuses to the number of medals paid out in a predetermined period (
%).

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 34 normal figure start gate 36 first start winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific Area (V Winning Gate)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with game control means capable of executing a game,
a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter;
a first display unit visible to the player;
a second display unit that is more difficult for a player to visually recognize than the first display unit;
The game control means is
When entering the ball entering area,
capable of outputting the first information to the first display unit;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of outputting second information to the second display section.

Images